Home

PowerFlex 20-COMM-C/-Q ControlNet Adapters User Manual

1. Computer with PowerFlex 70 Drive with ControlNet Connection SLC 5 05 Controller 20 COMM C Adapter with 1747 SCNR 0 Bl oj T 1 I 1 1 1 1 L Channel A H l i ControlNet _ optional redundancy Channel B pas a e miaa Eene s ee ema a ew Rime a a Aces a TIP Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to this manual where it is applicable Configuring the I O 4 31 Configuring Parameters for Network I O Because the I O for the drive is defined in the next subsection Use_ RSNetWorx for ControlNet Software to Configure the I O and Save It to the 1747 SCNR Scanner on page 4 31 there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 500 project version 7 00 or later until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 you need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks 1 Set adapter parameters 13 DPI I O Cfg 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output to values that meet your application requirements For this example the adapter I O parameters are set to these values Adapter Parameter No Setting 13 DPI I O Cfg XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 25 M S Input XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 26 M S Output XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 7 or power cycle the driv
2. Star topology shown NOTE The 20 COMM Q is designed for use with short distance 1786 RPFS repeaters which use the V pin type connector 4 Route the other end of the ControlNet cable through the bottom of the drive Figure 2 3 and insert its ControlNet cable plug into the mating adapter receptacle A 1786 TPS straight tap is recommended for connection to the 20 COMM C coax adapter For information about network system design and component installation see the following publications e ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET INO02 e ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET INO01 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Applying Power Installing the Adapter 2 7 ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage injury or death A exists Unpredictable operation may occur if you fail to verify that parameter settings are compatible with your application Verify that settings are compatible with your application before applying power to the drive Install the drive cover or close the drive door and apply power to the drive The adapter receives its power from the connected drive When you apply power to the adapter for the first time its topmost PORT status indicator should be steady green or flashing green after an initialization If it is red there is a problem See Chapter 7
3. Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 8 Get Active Time Zone Data STRUCT of INT Standard bias BYTE Standard month BYTE Standard day of week BYTE Standard week BYTE Standard hour BYTE Standard minute BYTE Standard second INT Daylight offset BYTE Daylight month BYTE Daylight day of week BYTE Daylight week BYTE Daylight hour BYTE Daylight minute BYTE Daylight second 9 Get Set Custom Time Zone Data STRUCT of INT Standard bias BYTE Standard month BYTE Standard day of week BYTE Standard week BYTE Standard hour BYTE Standard minute BYTE Standard second INT Daylight offset BYTE Daylight month BYTE Daylight day of week BYTE Daylight week BYTE Daylight hour BYTE Daylight minute BYTE Daylight second Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Read Full STRUCT of STRING 16 Name of the timer LWORD or Elapsed time in milliseconds unless timer is a STRUCT real time clock see attribute 2 BOOL 16 See Attribute 3 1 Get Timer Text STRING 16 Name of the timer 2 Get Set Timer Value LWORD Elapsed time in milliseconds unless the timer is a Ol real time clock STRUCT of Real Time Clock Data WORD Milliseconds 0 999 BYTE Seconds 0 59 BYTE Minutes 0 59 BYTE Hours 0 23 BYTE Days 1 31 BYTE Months 1 January 12 December BYTE Years since 1972 3 Get Timer Descriptor BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0
4. Usage Help Depending on the drive Table 5 J Table 5 K Table 5 L Table 5 M Table 5 N or Table 5 0 show the I O definitions as they relate to the N9 0 and N10 0 data table addresses in Figure 5 12 being used in this example 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 26 Using the I O PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 with Standard Control and PowerFlex 700H Drives When using any of these products which all contain INT 16 bit format data types you will read from and write to a single data table address in 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P the controller Table 5 J PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 70 Drives with Standard or Enhanced Control PowerFlex 700 Drives with Standard Control PowerFlex 700H Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Speed Feedback N9 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 N9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 N9 9 Value of paramet
5. Ee 5 F e E E Size in Elements Port Number 2 Target Device Error Local ControlNet Node 2 Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Communication Command CIP Generic Command type for controller to read data from the drive Service Code e Hex Code for the requested service Class Number 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance Number 3 Hex Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute Number 9 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute PLC 5 Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Elements 2 3 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the network is connected Local ControlNet Node 2 The node address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 To read a parameter in another port see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F to determine the instance number For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a Pow
6. ControlNet DPI Controller Scanner Adapter Word and I O PowerFlex Drive Output 0 Logic Command Logic Command Image 1 Reference Reference Write 2 Datalink In A1 Data In A1 3 Datalink In A2 E Data In A2 L 4 Datalink In B1 S gt Data In B1 5 Datalink In B2 Data In B2 6 Datalink In C1 pon Data In C1 7 Datalink IncC2 _ Data In C2 8 DatalinkInD1 Opt 1 0 Data In D1 9 DatalinkInD2 Board Data In D2 Outputs Input 0 Pad Word Image 1 Pad Word Read 2 Logic Status E Logic Status 3 Feedback iang Feedback 4 Datalink OutA1 j lt Data Out A1 En i 5 Datalink OutA2 j lt Data Out A2 6 Datalink OutB1 j Data Out B1 7 Datalink OutB2 j Data Out B2 8 Datalink OutC1 j Data Out C1 9 Datalink OutC2 j Data Out C2 10 Datalink Out D1 j Opt I O Data Out D1 11 Datalink OutD2 e Board Data Out D2 Inputs SSS MAL Message Message Message Handler Buffer Handler o Required by ControlLogix when using the Generic Profile May or may not be required by other types of controllers Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I O Data Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE 8 3 The data from the I O Board is loaded into the Datalink word starting with bit 0 of Datalink D1 and concluding with bit 14 Bit 15 of Datalink D1 is reserved as an input valid Status flag When the input data is valid bit 15 1 For example for the 20
7. Instances Hex Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF Host 0 Class Attributes Drive Only host devices can have alarms 1 Most Recent Alarm 2 Second Most Recent Alarm Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Maximum number of alarms that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Alarm Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear Alarm 2 Clear Alarm Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved BYTE BYTE WORDJ n 5 Get Number of Recorded Alarms WORD Number of alarms in the queue A 0 indicates the alarm queue is empty 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Instance Attributes ControlNet Objects C 25 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of WORD Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRING 16 Alarm text STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved WORD Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of WORD Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16
8. ControlNet Object PowerFlex PowerFlex Explicit Messaging Function Class Code 7 Class Drives 750 Series Drives Parameter Object Yes No Single parameter reads writes Ox0F DPI Parameter Yes Yes Single and scattered parameter Object 0x93 with limitations reads writes Host DPI Parameter No Yes Single and scattered parameter Object 0x9F with limitations reads writes 1 Enables access to drive parameters Port 0 DPI device parameters Ports 1 6 only and Host parameters Ports 7 14 only For example DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 can access a 20 COMM C adapter in Port 6 However Class code 0x93 cannot access for example the Host parameters in a 24V I O option module in Port 5 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 for instance parameter numbering Enables access to drive parameters Port 0 and Host parameters for all ports 1 14 Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F cannot access DPI device parameters For example if a 20 750 DNET option module is in Port 4 its Host parameters can be accessed but not its DPI device parameters See Host DP Parameter Object on page C 30 for instance parameter numbering Performing Explicit Messages Using Explicit Messaging 6 3 There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process The details of each step will vary depending on the type of controller being used See the documentation for your controller Important There must be a request messag
9. 3 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Words field to be set to 2 If the parameter being read is a 16 bit integer the Size in Words must be set to 1 When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Size in Words to be set to 2 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 43 SLC 500 Controller Example Read Single Response Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 52 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 6 52 Example Read Single Response Data File Z Data File N40 dec Radix Decimal p Columns 10 v Properties Usage Help Figure 6 53 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages of different parameter types in the SLC 500 controller Figure 6 53 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives
10. Scanner Code hex 0 No errors Class hex F dec 15 Instance hex 3 dec 3 Error Attribute hex 1 dec 1 Member hex 0 dec 0 Error Code hex 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Example Value 1 9 3 N40 0 500 2 Read Parameter 3 Dec Description The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Number of words to be received read Each word size is a 16 bit integer An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file The time in milliseconds that the message must be completed The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Code for the requested service Instance number is the same as the parameter number 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be read using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 s ee page 6 47
11. 0 Dec 0 Hex Scattered_Read_Request 4 30 4 Scattered_Read_Response Description Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Required for scattered messages Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Required for scattered messages Required for scattered messages Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 2 My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered_Read_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 4 In this example
12. 5 Press the Enter key to confirm your request If Clr Event Queue was selected all event queue entries will then display No Event 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Table 7 B Adapter Events Troubleshooting 7 7 Events Many events in the event queue occur under normal operation If you encounter unexpected communications problems the events may help you or Allen Bradley personnel troubleshoot the problem The following events may appear in the event queue Code Event Description 1 No Event Empty event queue entry 2 DPI Bus Off Fit A bus off condition was detected on DPI This event may be caused by loose or broken cables or by noise 3 Ping Time Flt A ping message was not received on DPI within the specified time 4 Port ID Fit The adapter is not connected to a correct port on a DPI product 5 Port Change Fit The DPI port changed after start up 6 Host Sent Reset The drive sent a reset event message 7 EEPROM Sum Fit The EEPROM in the adapter is corrupt 8 Online 125kbps The adapter detected that the drive is communicating at 125 kbps 9 Online 500kbps The adapter detected that the drive is communicating at 500 kbps 10 Bad Host Fit The adapter was connected to an incompatible product 11 Dup Port Fit Another peripheral with the same port number
13. RSLogix 5 500 5000 Software RSLogix software is a tool for configuring and monitoring controllers to communicate with connected devices It is a 32 bit application that runs on various Windows operating systems Information about RSLogix software can be found at http www software rockwell com rslogix RSNetWorx for ControlNet Software A software tool for configuring and monitoring ControlNet networks and connected devices It is a 32 bit application that can be used on computers running various Windows operating systems Information about RSNetWorx for ControlNet software can be found at http www software rockwell com rsnetworx Scanner A scanner is a separate module of a multi module controller or a built in component of a single module controller that provides communication with adapters connected to a network See also Controller Status Indicators LEDs that are used to report the status of the adapter network and drive They are on the adapter and can be viewed on the front cover of the drive when the drive is powered UDDT User Defined Data Type A structure data type that you define during the development of an application for example to convert 32 bit REAL parameter data for written and read values to correctly display them in human readable format Glossary G 7 Update The process of updating firmware in a device The adapter and its connected PowerFlex 7 Class host drive and its peripherals can be upda
14. 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Write a Single Parameter ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later A Parameter Write message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter write follow the RSLogix 5000 software any version single write example on page 6 10 Table 6 D Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Write_Message BOOL MSG Single_Write_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 6 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Write_Message MSG J Message CEN Message Control Single_Write_Message KC DN CER D Important If the explicit message single write must be written continuously use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 11 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Using Explicit Messag
15. 9 or A Hex Accel_Time_1 9 6 Description Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter This service is used to write a parameter value Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 4 My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single_Write_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 To write to a parameter in another port see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F to determine the instance number For example to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 215
16. Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use Explicit Messaging to configure and monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex 7 Class drive or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Important When used in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter must have firmware 3 001 or later to support explicit messaging to drive parameters Port 0 Furthermore the adapter requires firmware 3 002 or later for explicit messaging to parameters of peripherals in drive Ports 1 14 Topic Page About Explicit Messaging 6 2 Performing Explicit Messages 6 3 ControlLogix Controller Examples 6 4 PLC 5 Controller Examples 6 23 SLC 500 Controller Examples 6 40 A A ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists If Explicit Messages are programmed to write parameter data to Nonvolatile Storage NVS frequently the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Do not create a program that frequently uses Explicit Messages to write parameter data to NVS Datalinks d
17. afs i N10 0 a Zz a ai o WS AZ oO oO io N z Q ZN l AZ O o PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 52 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Figure 5 22 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Reference Source N30 1 0 lt Dest N10 1 15123 lt MUL Multiply Source A F8 3 0 0 lt Source B 1000 0 1000 0 lt Dest F8 4 0 0 lt LES ADD Less Than A lt B Add Source A F8 4 Source A F8 4 0 0 lt 0 0 lt Source B 32768 0 SourceB 65536 0 32768 0 lt 65536 0 lt Dest N10 2 O lt Source A F8 4 0 0 lt Source B 32768 0 32768 0 lt PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Reference PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Reference Continued on next page Using the I O 5 53 Continued from previous page PowerFlex Limit Test 750 Series Low Lim Drive Speed Reference Test 0 0 lt HighLim 327670 32767 0 lt Greater Than A gt B Source A F8 4 Source A F8 4 0 0 lt 0 0 lt SourceB 32767 0 SourceB 65536 0 32767 0 lt 65536 0 lt Dest N10 2 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 54 Using the I O Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P
18. 1 Get Number of Members WORD 1 2 Get Member List ARRAY of STRUCT WORD Size of member data WORD Size of member path Packed EPATH Member path 3 Conditional Data Array of Bits Data to be transferred 4 Get Size WORD Size of assembly data in bits 1 For instance 1 access rule for the data attribute is Get For instance 2 access rule is Get Set Important Setting an assembly object attribute can be done only when the Control Timeout class attribute 100 has been set to a non zero value 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 4 ControlNet Objects Register Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x07 7 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Instance Description 1 All I O data being read from the DPI device read only 2 All I O data written to the DPI device read write 3 Logic Status and Feedback data read only 4 Logic Command and Reference data read write 5 Datalink A input data from device to scanner read only 6 Datalink A output data from scanner to device read write 7 Datalink B input data from device to scanner read only 8 Datalink B output data from scanner to device read write 9 Datalink C input data from device to scanner read only 10 Datalink C ou
19. 93 Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run CO Error ER Done DN Transmitting ST Enabled EN Rev Addr Rev Elems N60 0 15 N70 0 6 Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters General Tab Example Value Description Communication Command Generic Bi Directional Command type for the controller to read multiple data from the drive Service Code 4b Hex Code for the requested service Class Number 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance Number 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Attribute Number Not used Snd Addr N60 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file Snd Elems 15 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Rev Addr N70 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Rev Elems 15 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 2 The node address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and Pow
20. A COP command must be used to copy the N60 integer array to a 16 bit integer or floating tag Figure 6 42 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer the data remains split into two 16 bit integers because there are no 32 bit integers in the PLC 5 controller If the parameter data type is a REAL then the destination tag is a floating point In this case the value must first be swapped with the high and low 16 bit integers and then the two integers copied COP into a floating point address See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 34 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 6 42 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Parameter 001 Output Freq In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 Output Freq 45 0 Hz REAL 7 Output Current 0 04 Amp REAL 137 Open Loop Fdbk 710659711 DINT 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data 45 0 Hz REAL 260 Analog In0 Value 9 361 Volts REAL 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 35 PLC 5 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters
21. Message Type Service Type Get Attribute Single pa Output_Current New Tag Service fe Hex Class 93 Code Instance 3 Hex Destination Hex Attribute 9 Enable Enable Waiting Start Eror Code Extended Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type Get Attribute Single This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code e Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 3 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 9 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Destination Output_Current The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 3 My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single_Read_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appro
22. Scattered_Read_Response 7 23698 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Read_Response 9 26035 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 9 21581 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 10 O INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Read_Response 11 16948 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 12 260 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 13 9437 INT Parameter Value LSW El Scattered_Read_Response 14 16661 INT Parameter Value MSW The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the Scattered_Read_Response integer array to a 32 bit integer or REAL tag Figure 6 18 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a REAL then the destination tag is a REAL If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer then the destination tag is a DINT See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL Using Explicit Messaging 6 17 Figure 6 18 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Copy File OP Source Scattered_Read_Response 1 Output_Frequency Dest Length Copy File Source Scattered_Read_Response 4 Output_Current Dest Length Copy File Source Scattered_Read_Response 7 Open_Loop_Fdbk Dest Length Copy File 2 Source Scattered_Read_Response 10 Analog_Out0_Data Dest Length Copy File Source Scatter
23. Tag My_PowerFlex_Drive Message Configuration Single _Read_Message Message Configuration Single _Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Message Configuration Single _Read_Message Single_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Type Parameter Read x Servi 3 cece e Hex Class ff Hen Destination Instance 3 Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Enable Waiting Attribute 1 Hex Start Extended Error Code Done Output_Current zi New Tag Done Length 0 I Timed Out ox s The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Parameter Read This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code l e Hex Code for the requested service Class f Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 3 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 1 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Destination Output_Current The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will foll
24. e PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase Il control e PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control e PowerFlex 755 drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings ae pe alec p Szem Words Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output Vv Vv 6 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Vv Vv Vv 10 8 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 Vv Vv Y iv 14 12 0 0111 0 0111 0 0111 Y Y V vU iy 18 16 01111 01111 01111 Y Y Yv v v 22 20 11111 11111 11111 10 TIP For instructions on configuring the I O for the adapter using Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg and its Master Slave hierarchy using Parameters 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output see Setting the I O Configuration on page 3 3 When using Datalinks up to 8 drive Data In xx parameters 300 307 and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters 310 317 must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application After setting the information in the drive s New Module screen click OK The Module Properties screen appears Click the Connection tab E Module Properties My_ControlNet_Bridge CONTROLNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval RPI 10 0 4ms 2 0 3200 0 ms F Inhibit Module F Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Statu
25. 0 0011 Vv Vv viv 8 6 00111 00111 00111 Vv Vv viviv 10 l8 01111 01111 01111 Vv Vv Vviviviv i2 10 11111 11111 11111 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 36 Configuring the I O Table 4 H Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control e PowerFlex Digital DC drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings ei ale le p Szem Words Par13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output Y Y 4 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Y Y Y 8 6 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 Y Y Viv 12 10 0 0114 00114 001114 Vv Y Y Uv v 16 14 01114 01111 01114 Vv Vv Y v W i 20 18 wl 11114 1 1111 1 1111 Table 4 1 Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase Il control e PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control e PowerFlex 755 drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings ee ia ale le p SzinWords Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output Vv Vv 6 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Vv Y Y 10 8 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v Y Viv 14 12 0 0111 00114 00114
26. 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner 1756 SA3000 Drive Interface 1756 SA3100 Drive Interface 1756 SA500 Drive Intettace 1756 B3000 Drive Interface 1756 SD3000 Drive Interface 1756 SF3000 Drive Interface 1756 DeviceNet Scanner 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethemet Bridge Fiber Media 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethemet Bridge Twisted Pair Media 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge 2 Post Twisted P T7ER INAN Minne Fihamat Reid IPod TusiehadP 124 of 124 Module Types Found F Close on Create Addit Favorites 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 4 Configuring the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P In this example we use a 1756 CNB ControlNet Bridge Series E so the 1756 CNB option is selected Click CREATE In the Select Major Revision pop up dialog box select the major revision of its firmware Click OK The bridge s New Module screen appears New Module Type 1756 CNB E 1756 ControlNet Bridge Vendor Allen Bradley Name My_ControlNet_Bridae Description Revision UE 1 R Electronic Keying Compatible Keying C Open Module Properties 8 Edit the following Box Setting Name A name to identify the ControlNet bridge Description Optional description of the ControlNet bridge Node The node address of the ControlNet bridge Slot The slot of the ControlNet bridge in the rack Revision The minor revision of the firmware
27. A Generic Bi Directional scattered write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Drive Parameter Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog In0 Hi 5 5 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 43 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters CIO ControlNet I O Transfer CEN Control CT16 0 CDN Setup Screen lt ER gt Important If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate Generic Set service explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F and attribute A see page 6 27 Attribute
28. BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved 2 Get International Alarm Text STRINGN Text describing the alarm with support for Unicode 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 26 ControlNet Objects DPI Diagnostic Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x99 153 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of diagnostic items in the device The total number of diagnostic items can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Diagnostic Item 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Diagnostic Item 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 0x4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Diagnostic Item1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 0x5C00 0x5FFF 7 123552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 124576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 27648
29. BYTE Day 17 Get Product Revision STRUCT of BYTE Major Firmware Release BYTE Minor Firmware Release 18 Get Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00 and OxFFFFFFFF 19 Set Language Selected BYTE 0 Default HIM will prompt at start up 1 Language was selected no prompt 20 Set Customer Generated Firmware STRING 36 GUID Globally Unique Identifier identifying customer firmware flashed into the device 30 Get International Status Text STRINGN Text describing the status of device with support for Unicode 31 Get Set International User Definable Text STRINGN Text identifying the device with a user supplied name with support for Unicode 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ControlNet Objects C 15 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 34 Get Key Information STRUCT of DWORD _ Rating Code DWORD Device Serial Number WORD Customization Code WORD Customization Revision WORD Brand Code BYTE Family Code BYTE Config Code BYTE Language Code BYTE Major Revision BYTE Minor Revision BYTE 16 Customer Generated Firmware UUID 35 Get NVS CRC DWORD A 32 bit CRC of the Non Volatile Storage in a device 39 Get SI Driver Code WORD Code identifying the protocol between the device and host 128 Get Customization Code WORD Code identifying the customized device 129 Get Customization Revision Number WORD Revision of the customized device 130 Get Customizati
30. Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 t 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 16 17 Extended Data Type Bit 2 at eit eee p used as an arra 18 Extended Data Type Bit 3 010 Reserved y 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 Not Used Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Not a Link Source 0 Parameter can be a source for a link 1 Parameter cannot be a source for a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI Limits Object 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 20 ControlNet Objects Extended Descriptor Attributes Bit Name D
31. Command_Start Command_Stop Speed_Feedback Speed_Reference Status_Active Status_At_ Speed Status_Faulted Status_Forward Status_Ready Status_Reverse 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P amp Style Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Data Type Using the I O 5 19 Depending on the drive being used see one of the following subsections for information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling Subsection Page PowerFlex 70 700 700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control 5 9 PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5 10 PowerFlex 753 755 Drives 5 10 PowerFlex Digital DC Drives 5 11 Figure 5 8 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Status Feedback My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 0 Status_Ready My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 1 Status_Active My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 3 Status_Forward My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 3 w c Status_Reverse My_PowerFlex_D rive Data 2 7 Status_Faulted My_PowerFlex_Drive _Data 2 8 Status_At_Speed MOV Move Dest Source My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 3 O Speed_Feedback O Copy File Source My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 4 Dest Length Speed_Feedback 2 PowerFlex 70
32. For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 44 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service A Write Parameter message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter write follow the SLC 500 Generic Attribute Service single write example on page 6 51 Figure 6 54 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter B3 0 CEM 4 F ControlNet Explicit Message EN 1 Control Block N14 0 CDN gt Control Block Length 67 CER Setup Screen lt Important If the explicit message single write must be written continuously use the Generic Set Attribute Single service and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 51 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Using Explicit Messaging 6 45 SLC 500 Controller Formatting a Messag
33. INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Wite_Request 2 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Write_Request 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Wite_Request 4 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Wite_Request 5 a INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Write_Request 6 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Request INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Write_Request 8 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Write_Request 9 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Request 10 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered _Write_Request 11 o INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Write_Request 12 7 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Request 13 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Write_Request 14 INT Parameter Value MSW ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data The results of the message appear in the destination tag named Scattered_Write_Response Figure 6 22 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 21 Figure 6 22 Example Scattered Write Response Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Scattered_Write_Response INT 15 Scattered_Write_Response 0 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write_Response 1 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write_Response 2 INT Pad Word Scattered_Write_Response 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Response 4 INT Pad Word or E
34. Internal Interface cable 2 3 2 4 peripheral G 2 products 1 3 G 2 DPI Alarm object C 24 DPI Data Rate parameter B 1 DPI Device object C 13 DPI Diagnostic object C 26 DPI External Comms Kit using adapter in 8 1 DPI Fault object C 22 DPI I O Act parameter B 3 DPI I O Cfg parameter B 3 DPI Parameter object C 16 DPI Port parameter B 1 DPI Time object C 28 DriveExecutive software adapter configuration tool 1 4 3 1 definition website G 3 DriveExplorer software adapter configuration tool 1 4 3 1 definition website G 3 drives see PowerFlex drives DriveTools SP software G 3 E EDS Electronic Data Sheet files G 3 EEPROM see Nonvolatile Storage NVS environmental specifications A 2 equipment required 1 3 events clearing viewing 7 6 list of 7 7 explicit messaging about 6 2 configuring for ControlLogix controller 6 4 PLC 5 controller 6 23 SLC 500 controller 6 40 definition G 3 performing 6 3 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P F fault action configuring the adapter for 3 5 definition G 3 fault configuration configuring the adapter for 3 6 definition G 3 faults see events features 1 2 firmware revision P 1 update guidelines 3 8 Fit Cfg A1 D2 In parameters B 3 Fit Cfg Logic parameter B 3 Fit Cfg Ref parameter B 3 G grounding the adapter 2 5 H HIM Human Interface Module accessing parameters with 3 2 definition G 4 LCD m
35. M Graph Spreadsheet Diagnostics J Message Code Date Description one s1e4 6 8 2007 9 42 49 Mode changed to online The communication timeout is 3000 msec The online path is USMEQDMWISNIE2 ControlNet oner siss 6 8 2007 9 42 49 The online active keeper is valid and there is no offine configuration The online active keeper status will be checked eve j gt Ready Online Not Browsing If the icon for the drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC on the network appears as Unrecognized Device you must download the EDS file for that PowerFlex drive from the Rockwell Automation website a Go to the website http www rockwellautomation com resources eds b On the website search screen in the Network entry field enter the type of network for this example ControlNet which enables the use of the other search fields c In the Keyword entry field enter the type of PowerFlex drive for this example PowerFlex 70EC noting that this field is space sensitive d Click Search Due to the large number of EDS files this search may take seconds or up to several minutes e On the search results screen in the Details amp Download Column click the Download hyperlink for the EDS file f Click Save on the File Download screen to save the EDS file to an appropriate location on your computer g Launch the EDS Hardware Installation Tool by clicking the Microsoft Windows Start button and sele
36. Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 7 or power cycle the drive For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values see Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5 24 Figure 4 4 Controller Tags Force Mask Data Type My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive C Tsar fear AB CONTROLNET_ My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Reo Bec AB CONTROLNET_ My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Data Torch Decimal INT 12 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Data Q 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Data 1 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l Data 2 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Data 3 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l Data 4 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l Data 5 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Data 6 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l Data 7 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Data 8 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l Data 9 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l Data 10 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l Data 11 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 fe fee AB CONTROLNET_ My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data APAT Decimal INT 10 My_PowerFlex_ 70_EC_Drive 0 Data 0 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data 1 o Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data 2 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data 3 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Dr
37. Service Custom Service Code hex Scanner Code hex 0 No errors Class hex 93 dec 147 Instance hex dec 0 Attribute hex deck o Error Member hex dec fo Error Code hex 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters General Tab 1747 SCNR Slot Size in Words Receive Data Size in Words Send Data Data Table Address Receive Data Data Table Address Send Data Message Timeout ControlNet Addr Service Service Code Class Instance Attribute Example Value 1 15 2 15 2 N70 0 N60 0 500 2 Custom 4B Hex 93 or 9F Hex 0 Dec 0 Dec Description The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Number of words to be received read Each word size is a 16 bit integer Number of words to be sent Each word size is a 16 bit integer An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file The time in milliseconds that the message must be completed The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Required for scattered messages Code for the requested s
38. Vv Y Y V v 18 16 01114 01114 01114 Y Y V v v U 22 20 wl 1114 1 1111 1 1111 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 11 Because N files are used in Using the I O Chapter 5 and memory files cannot be used for 32 bit REAL floating point data the default Input Address M1 e 3 and Output Address MO e 3 will need to be converted later using COP instructions in the ladder logic program For now leave these address fields at their defaults and click OK An address row in blue text will be added below the PowerFlex 70 EC drive row 12 Select File gt Save to save the I O configuration file to the 1747 SCNR scanner The Save Configuration dialog box appears Save Configuration Either of the following choices will save the updated schedule OK to the file and to the online network if you are online o Save Type Cancel Optimize and re write schedule for all connections c Help TIP When both Save Type choices are available we recommend to click the Optimize and re write schedule for all connections Configuring the I O 4 37 13 Click OK to download the I O configuration to the scanner A warning will appear about communication and I O disruption on the network 14 Click Yes If this is the first time that you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to sav
39. words starting at word 0 e ControlLogix CompactLogix Controllers only The drive profile used in RSLogix 5000 software drive Add on Profile in version 16 00 or later Classic Profile in versions 13 00 15 00 or Generic Profile in all versions ControlLogix Controller Image Because the drive Add on Profile in RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later and the Classic Profile versions 13 00 15 00 provide descriptive controller tags the I O image tag size and location is automatically configured based on the drive being used When using the Generic Profile page 4 18 in RSLogix 5000 software however controller tags are not descriptive or defined The ControlLogix controller I O image changes depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and Datalinks and the number of Datalinks used Table 5 A Table 5 B and Table 5 C show the I O image when using various PowerFlex drives and all Datalinks enabled Using the I O 5 3 Table 5 A ControlLogix Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerF e PowerF 5 Q a ex 700 drives with standard control ex 700H drives Output I O Logic Command Reference Datalink In A1 Datalink In A2 Datalink In B1 Datalink In B2 Datalink In C1 Datalink In C2 Datali
40. 0 Ibein eae Adapter RO Internal Interface Cable folded behind the adapter AT and in front of the drive Ground Tab Detail IASI Hie Hi J Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and is under the adapter before tightening x continuity exists between the head of aae i ul f oo J et A screw After tightening the screw verify ak e E the screw and drive ground Frames 2 through 6 lt FU E 0 9 Nem i 8 0 Ibein h 4 Places 1 p Al a EE TA f m a Us EE TE PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700S Adapter mounts on door 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibein 4 Places PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger Adapter mounts behind HIM panel Adapter mounts in drive Ground Tab Detail Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and is under the adapter before tightening screw After tightening the screw verify continuity exists between the head of
41. 1203 SSS converter and PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs catalog number 20 HIM xxx are examples of DPI peripherals DPI Product A device that uses the DPI communication interface to communicate with one or more peripheral devices For example a motor drive such as a PowerFlex 7 Class drive is a DPI product In this manual a DPI product is also referred to as drive or host Glossary G 3 DriveExplorer Software A tool for monitoring and configuring Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters It can be used on computers running various Microsoft Windows operating systems DriveExplorer software version 3 xx or later can be used to configure this adapter and PowerFlex drives This software tool has been discontinued and is now available as freeware at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html There are no plans to provide future updates to this tool and the download is being provided as is for users that lost their DriveExplorer CD or need to configure legacy products not supported by Connected Components Workbench software DriveTools SP Software A software suite designed for running on various Microsoft Windows operating systems This software suite provides a family of tools including DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later that you can use to program monitor control troubleshoot and maintain Allen Bradley products DriveTools SP software can be used with PowerFlex 7 Class and
42. 1797 ACNR15 C 1797 ControlNet Adapter Redundant Media 2711P RN15C B ControlNet Module for PanelView Plus 400 600 2711P RN15S A ControlNet Module for PanelView Plus 700 1500 VersaView CE 2711P RN15S B ControlNet Module for PanelView Plus 700 1500 VersaView CE PH PSSCCNA A ControlNet Adapter Redundant Media Controllers Drives HMI Other rm Find Add Favorite By Category By Vendor Favorites Cancel Help J In our example we right click on the 1756 CNBR D bridge Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules Select CONTROLNET MODULE from the list to configure the drive and its connected 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter Click OK The drive s New Module screen appears New Module Type CONTROLNET MODULE Generic ControlNet Module Parent My_ControlNet_Bridge EEA Assembly Instance Size Name My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Input 1 16 bit Description Output 2 H 16bit Configuration E 0 ebi Comm Format Data INT e Node 2 IV Open Module Properties Cancel Help Edit the following information about the drive and adapter Box Setting Name A name to identify the drive and adapter Description Optional description of the drive adapter Comm Format Data INT This setting formats the data in 16 bit words Node The node address of the adapter Open Module When
43. 2 B3 1 ali a ES Pd 1 1 _ Actual Direction _ Status Forward N9 2 B3 1 IC r5 r a PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex Actual Direction _ Status Reverse 750 Series N9 2 B3 1 Drives 14 os 3 4 _ Drive Faulted Status Faulted N9 2 B3 1 J E a ali 7 7 _ Drive At Speed _ Status At Speed N9 2 B3 1 E ry ea os 8 8 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 50 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Greater Than A gt B Source A Move Source Source B 32768 0 Dest Figure 5 20 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Feedback PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Feedback 32768 0 32768 0 lt F8 0 0 0 lt Limit Test LowLim 32767 0 Test High Lim Limit Test Low Lim Test HighLim 32767 0 Less Than A lt B Source A 65536 0 65536 0 lt F3 0 0 0 lt Using the I O 5 51 Depending on the drive being used see one of the following subsections for information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling Subsection Page PowerFlex 70 700 700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control 5 9 PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5 10 PowerFlex 753 755 Drives 10 PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Figure 5 21 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Command ius N10 0 N MSs uu oe
44. 20 HIM A3 20 HIM A5 20 HIM C38S and 20 HIM C5S HIMs PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 C6S HIM Human Interface Module User Manual publication 20HIM UM001 Information on installing and using PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 and 20 HIM C6S HIMs PowerFlex 70 User Manual publication 20A UM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual publication PELEX RM001 standard control and enhanced control drives PowerFlex 70 Enhanced Control and 700 Vector Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RIM004 PowerFlex 700 Series A User Manual publication 20B UM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700 Series B User Manual publication 20B UM002 standard control and vector control Series A drives and PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM001 PowerFlex 700 vector control Series B drives PowerFlex 70 Enhanced Control and 700 Vector Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM004 PowerFlex 700H Installation Instructions publication PFLEX INO06 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700H PowerFlex 700H Programming Manual publication 20C PM001 drives 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Resou PowerF PowerF PowerF PowerF PowerF PowerF PowerF PowerF rce ex 700S w Phase Control Installation Manual Frames 1 6 publication 20D IN024 ex 700S w Phase Control User Manual All Frame Sizes publicati
45. 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 D These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD 1 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of diagnostic items in the device 3 Get ENUM Offset WORD DPI ENUM object instance offset 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ControlNet Objects C 27 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 19 CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Pad Word WORD Pad Word STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz UINT Multiplier 2 UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset DWORD Link source of the value 0 no link STRING 16 Always zero 0 Parameter name 1 Get Set Value Various Diagnostic item value 2 Get International Diagnostic Item Text STRUCT of STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 3 Get International Full Read All STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum CONTAINER Maximum CONTAINER Default WORD Pad Word WORD Pad Word WORD Multiplier WORD Di
46. 3 2 1 0 Default 100 00 Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Type Read Write Reset Required No that changes to Parameter 27 Ref Adjust take effect immediately A drive ATTENTION To guard against equipment damage and or personal injury note receiving its Reference from the adapter will receive the newly scaled Reference resulting in a change of speed Appendix C ControlNet Objects This appendix presents information about the ControlNet objects that can be accessed using Explicit Messages For information on the format of Explicit Messages and example ladder logic programs see Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Object Class Code Page Object Class Code Page Hex Dec Hex Dec Identity Object 0x01 1 C 2 DPI Parameter Object 0x93 147 C 16 Assembly Object 0x04 4 C 3 DPI Fault Object 0x97 151 C 22 Register Object 0x07 7 C 4 DPI Alarm Object 0x98 152 C 24 Parameter Object Ox0F 15 C 5 DPI Diagnostic Object 0x99 153 C 26 Parameter Group Object 0x10 16 C 7 DPI Time Object Ox9B 155 C 28 PCCC Object 0x67 103 C 8 Host DPI Parameter Object 2 ox9F 159 C 30 DPI Device Object 0x92 146 C 13 1 These objects are not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive This object is supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive gt TIP See the ControlNet
47. 4 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 15 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 16 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 17 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 18 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 9 Program Tags amp Data Type Description AB CONTR INT 10 INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Data Type AB CONTR INT 20 INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Output Image Logic Command Speed Reference Datalink In A1 PowerFlex 70 Drive Datalink In A2 16 bit Speed Reference and Datalink In B1 Datalinks Datalink In B2 Datalink In C1 Datalink In C2 Datalink In D1 Datalink In D2 Description Output Image Logic Command Not Used Reference LSW Reference MSW Datalink In A1 LSW Datalink In A1 MSW Datalink In AZ SW PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Datalink In A2 MSW hi ETE 32 bit Speed Reference and Datalink In B1 MSW Datalinks Datalink In B2 LSW Datalink In B2 MSW Datalink In C1 LSW Datalink In C1 MSW Datalink In C2 LSW Datalink In C2 MSW Datalink In D1 LSW Datalink In D1 MSW Datalink In D2 LSW Datalink In D2 MSW To use the Controller tags that are automatically created you need to create the following Program tags for this example program Figure 5 7 ControlLogix Program Tags for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name Command_Clear_Faults Cormmand_Forward_Reverse Command_Jog
48. 44 0001 Spd Ref B Auto Par 48 0010 Preset Spd 2 Auto 0011 Preset Spd 3 Auto 0100 Preset Spd 4 Auto 0101 Preset Spd 5 Auto 0110 Preset Spd 6 Auto 0111 Preset Spd 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 1101 DPI 5 Manual 1110 Reserved 1111 Jog Ref Glossary Adapter Devices such as drives controllers and computers usually require a network communication adapter to provide a communication interface between them and a network such as ControlNet An adapter reads data on the network and transmits it to the connected device It also reads data in the device and transmits it to the network The 20 COMM C coax or 20 COMM Q fiber ControlNet adapter connects PowerFlex 7 Class drives to a ControlNet network Adapters are sometimes also called cards embedded communication options gateways modules or peripherals Bridge A network device that can route messages from one network to another A bridge also refers to a communication module in a ControlLogix controller that connects the controller to a network See also Scanner Bus Off A bus off condition occurs when an abnormal rate of errors is detected on the Control Area Network CAN bus in a device The bus off device cannot receive or transmit messages on the network This condition is often caused by corruption of the network data signals due to
49. 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 51 21555 or 5433 Hex 3 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A 10 decimal will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the A 10 decimal setting 4 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Words field to be set to 1 If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer the Size in Words must be set to 2 When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Size in Words to be set to 2 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL The following page shows ladder logic to convert floating point data into integer files See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM C Q Contr
50. 6 programmable logic controller see controller Q quick start 1 6 R Ref Adjust parameter B 4 Ref Fdbk Size parameter B 1 Reference Feedback definition G 6 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 5 2 PLC 5 controller 5 4 SLC 500 controller 5 6 setting an adjustment 3 5 using 5 8 Register object C 4 regulatory compliance A 2 related documentation P 2 requested packet interval 4 9 4 21 Reset Module parameter B 2 ribbon cable see Internal Interface cable RSLinx Classic software documentation P 3 using 4 1 RSLogix 5 500 5000 software G 6 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P RSNetWorx for ControlNet software configuring saving I O to ControlLogix controller 4 13 PLC 5 controller 4 25 SLC 500 controller s 1747 SCNR scanner 4 31 definition website G 6 S safety precautions 1 5 scanner G 6 SLC 500 controller configuring the I O 4 30 explicit messaging 6 40 using the I O 5 38 specifications for adapter A 1 status indicators definition G 6 locating 7 1 MOD 7 1 7 2 NET A 7 1 7 3 NET B 7 1 7 3 normal operation 2 7 PORT 7 1 7 2 troubleshooting with 7 2 to 7 3 understanding 7 1 switches to set node address 2 2 T technical support P 2 tools required 1 3 troubleshooting 7 1 to 7 8 U UDDT User Defined Data Type G 6 update definition G 7 guidelines 3 8 W website Connected Components Workbench software G 1 Con
51. 70 or Figure 6 71 to store the request values to be read from these drive parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog Ini Value e Parameter 260 Analog In0 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 70 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N60 dec Radix Decimal Columns 10 Radix Decimal l Columns 10 SLC 500 Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 72 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters Figure 6 72 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N70 dec Radix Decimal pe Columns 10 Using Explicit Messaging 6 57 In this example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Address Read Value 1 Output Freq N70 1 90 0 Hz 3 Output Current N70 4 0 09 Am
52. A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 36 Using Explicit Messaging PLC 5 Controller Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Figure 6 44 Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens ClO CT16 0 DoR Ins dd Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This PLCS 2 ControlNet Nodefdec 2 4 CIO CT16 0 MultiHop Command Control Bits Communication Command Generic Bi Directional 2 Service Code Hes 4o k Ignore if timed out TO 0 Class Number Hex 93 Awaiting Execution EW fo Instance Number Hex 0 Continuous Run CO 0 Attribute Number Hex Eror ERI g This PLC 5 Done DN 0 Snd ddr N80 0 Rev ddr N90 0 Transmitting ST o Snd Elems RevElems 15 Enabled EN 0 Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters General Tab Example Value Description Communication Command Generic Bi Directional Command type for the controller to write multiple data to the drive Service Code 4c Hex Code for the requested service Class N
53. C 30 Class code 0x9F 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 Using Explicit Messaging 6 37 PLC 5 Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 45 or Figure 6 48 to store the request values to be written to these drive parameters 143 Decel Time 2 105 Preset Speed 5 106 Preset Speed 6 107 Preset Speed 7 Address Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Data Type Drive Parameter N90 1 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec REAL N90 4 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec REAL N90 7 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 32 bit integer N90 10 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog In0 Hi 5 5 REAL N90 13 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 32 bit integer See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 45 or Figure 6 48 shows the parameter values Figure 6 45 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive 4 Data File N80 dec N80 0 Radix Decimal pe Symbol Columns 10 Desc N80 a Properties Usage Help PLC 5 Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data In this message example we use the data table addre
54. DPI port 9 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 ControlNet Objects C 13 DPI Device Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x92 146 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device The total number of components can be read in Instance 0 Class Attribute 4 Instances Hex Dec Device
55. Description 0 Ready Default 1 Reset Module 2 Set Defaults When you enter 1 Reset Module the adapter will be immediately reset When you enter 2 Set Defaults the adapter will set all adapter parameters to their factory default values After performing a Set Defaults enter 1 Reset Module so that the new values take effect The value of this parameter will be restored to 0 Ready after the adapter is reset The following parameters provide information about the status of the adapter You can view these parameters at any time Parameter 04 CN Addr Act Description The node address used by the adapter This will be one of the following values e The address set by the rotary switches e The value of Parameter 03 CN Addr Cfg e Anold address of the switches or parameter if they have been changed and the adapter has not been reset 06 CN Rate Act The data rate used by the adapter 07 Ref Fdbk Size The size of the Reference Feedback It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits It is set in the drive and the adapter automatically uses the correct size 08 Datalink Size The size of the Datalinks It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits It is set in the drive and the adapter automatically uses the correct size 12 CN Active Cfg Source from which the adapter node address is taken This will be either 0 Switches or 1 EEPROM in which the addre
56. Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Component 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Component 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Component 1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 Ox5C00 0x5FFF M 22552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Family Code BYTE 0x00 Communications Adapter 0x30 PowerFlex 70 0x34 PowerFlex 700H 0x38 0x39 or Ox3A PowerFlex 700 0x40 PowerFlex 7000 0x48 0x49 or 0x4A PowerFlex 700S Ox5A SMC Flex 0x68 0x69 or Ox6A PowerFlex 700VC 0x90 PowerFlex 753 755 OxA0 20 750 xxx Option Module OxFF HIM 1 Get Family Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Man
57. Host 2 15 Peripherals on Ports 1 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 2 WORD Total number of instances Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Vendor ID WORD 1 Allen Bradley 2 Get Device Type WORD 120 20 COMM C 129 20 COMM Q 3 Get Product Code WORD Number identifying product name and rating 4 Get Revision STRUCT of Major BYTE Value varies Minor BYTE Value varies 5 Get Status WORD Bit 0 Owned Bit 2 Configured Bit 10 Recoverable fault Bit 11 Unrecoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number DWORD Unique 32 bit number 7 Get Product Name SHORT_STRING Product name and rating 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Assembly Object ControlNet Objects C 3 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x04 4 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Instance Description 1 All I O data being read from the DPI device read only 2 All I O data being written to the DPI device read write Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Revision WORD 2 2 Get Max Instance WORD 2 100 Set Control Timeout WORD Control timeout in seconds Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
58. Idle Flt Action to Send Fit Cfg the values in the following parameters are sent to the drive after an I O communication fault and or idle fault occurs You must set these parameters to values required by your application Parameter 15 Fit Cfg Logic Description A 16 bit value sent to the drive for Logic Command 16 Fit Cfg Ref 17 Fit Cfg x1 In through 24 Fit Cfg x2 In A 32 bit value 0 4294967295 sent to the drive as a Reference or Datalink Important If the drive uses a 16 bit Reference or 16 bit Datalinks the most significant word of the value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required Resetting the Adapter Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters Configuring the Adapter 3 7 Changes to switch settings and some adapter parameters require that you reset the adapter before the new settings take effect You can reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using Parameter 09 Reset Module adapter is transmitting control I O to the drive the drive may fault ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected adapter Set Parameter 09 Reset Module to 1 Reset Module Port 5 Device 20 COMM C Parameter 09 Reset Module 1 Reset Module Value
59. KC DN gt KERS 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 14 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version Figure 6 13 Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Configuration Communication Tag Scattered_Read_Message Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type Service Type Service Code Instance CIP Generic Custom 4b Hex Class 0 Attribute Source Element Source Length 30 Destination v Scattered_Read_Rec yl Bytes Scattered_Read_Re DA New Tag Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Enable Waiting Extended Eror Code Start Done Done Length 0 I Timed Out The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters Configuration Tab Message Type Service Type Service Code Class Instance Attribute Source Element Source Length Destination Example Value CIP Generic Custom 4b Hex 93 or 9F Hex
60. Language BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 6 ControlNet Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Parameter Value 2 Get Link Path Size BYTE 0 No link specified n The size of Attribute 3 in bytes 3 Get Link Path 4 4 Get Descriptor WORD 0 False 1 True Bit 1 Supports ENUMs Bit 2 Supports scaling Bit 3 Supports scaling links Bit 4 Read only Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Extended precision scaling 5 Get Data Type BYTE 1 WORD 16 bit 2 UINT 16 bit 3 INT 16 bit 5 SINT 6 DINT 8 USINT 9 UDINT 11 REAL 23 SHORT_STRING 24 BYTE 25 DWORD 6 Get Data Size BYTE 3 7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING 8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING 9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING Null string 10 Get Minimum Value B 3 11 Get Maximum Value 2 3 12 Get Default Value 2 3 13 Get Scaling Multiplier WORD 3 14 Get Scaling Divisor WORD 3 15 Get Scaling Base WORD 3 16 Get Scaling Offset WORD 3 17 Get Multiplier Link WORD 3 18 Get Divisor Link WORD 3 19 Get Base Link WORD 3 20 Get Offset Link WORD 3 21 Get Decimal Precision BYTE 3 2 3 4 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publicatio
61. Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 34 ControlNet Objects Extended Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OxFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OxFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OxFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OxFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OxFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OxFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance 0xFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance 0xFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance 0xFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance OxFFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OxFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OxFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 FP Max Decimals Bit 0 These four bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum number of 17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 decimal places to be displayed for small values A value of 0 indicates to not limit the 18 EP Max Decimals Bit 2 number of decimal places used 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter 0 Not an Extended Parameter Reference Reference 1 Extended Parameter Refer
62. Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 2 4 Installing the Adapter Figure 2 2 DPI Ports and Internal Interface Cables 20 COMM C coaxial Adapter shown a ie ooon eii ee PowerFlex 70 All Frames 000000000000 o o lt gt gt o PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700S Frames 2 through 6 HIM panel opens to allow access to DPI F interface To open panel remove screws on left side of HIM x panel and swing open 8 e x PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger Item Description o 15 24 cm 6 in Internal Interface cable DPI Connector ControlNet cable s 0 2 54 cm 1 in Internal Interface cable 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Installing the Adapter 2 5 Figure 2 3 Mounting and Grounding the Adapter PowerFlex 70 All Frame Sizes Adapter mounts in drive Drive per ESTA Q 0 9 Nem 8
63. N90 dec EAER 538 26214 16817 0 21555 Oo 16560 780 10019 2 HE Radix Decimal Columns 10 v The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag array N80 Figure 6 81 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 81 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Data File N80 dec EER 0 21555 2E Radix Decimal Se Columns 10 v 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 64 Using Explicit Messaging Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Understanding the Status Indicators Troubleshooting Chapter 7 This chapter provides information for diagnosing and troubleshooting potential problems with the adapter and network Topic Page Understanding the Status Indicators 7 1 PORT Status Indicator 7 2 MOD Status Indicator 7 2 NET A and NET B Status Indicators 7 3 Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 7 4 Viewing and Clearing Events 7 6 The adapter has four status indicators They can be viewed on the adapter or through the drive cover J ay 5 Location on drive may vary Allen Bradley fo O Item Indicator Name Description See 1 PORT DPI Connection Status page 7 2 MOD Adapter Status page 7 2 NETA ControlNet Channel A Sta
64. Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating X Jogging 0 Not Jogging 1 Jogging X Fault 0 No Fault Par 323 324 325 1 Fault xX Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 326 327 328 1 Alarm x Flash Mode 0 Not in Flash Mode 1 In Flash Mode X Run Ready 0 Not Ready to Run Par 156 1 Ready to Run x At Limit 0 Not At Limit Par 304 1 At Limit X Tach Loss Sw 0 Not Tach Loss Sw 1 Tach Loss Sw X At Zero Spd 0 Not At Zero Speed 1 At Zero Speed X At Setpt Spd 0 Not At Setpoint Speed 1 At Setpoint Speed X Enable 0 Not Enabled 1 Enabled 1 See Parameter 304 Limit Status in the PowerFlex 700S drive User Manual for a description of the limit status conditions 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Logic Command Status Words D 5 PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Important When using a 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the upper word bits 16 31 of the Logic Command and Logic Status words are not accessible and cannot be used Only when using a PowerFlex 750 Series drive with a 20 750 communication Option Module or the PowerFlex 755 drive s embedded EtherNet IP adapter is the upper word accessible and used Logic Command Word Logic Bits 31 15 14 13 12 11 10 Command Description Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop 1 Normal Stop Start 0 Not
65. OK Cancel Help p TIP To get the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate 6 In the Module Definition screen edit the following information Box Revision Setting The major and minor revision of the firmware database in the drive If the drive s major and minor revision is not available the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct database revision use one of the following buttons at the bottom left of the Module Definition screen e Create Database Creates a database from an online network drive Clicking this button displays an RSLinx software RSWho window Browse to the online drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC select it and click OK The database will be uploaded and stored on the computer Thereafter close the Module Definition screen and then re open it to display the new revision e Web Update When a drive is not available online opens the Allen Bradley Drives Web Updates website to download a specific database file After downloading the file close the Module Definition screen and then re open it to display the new revision e Match Drive Use this button when the drive being added to the network matches the drive profile revision rating configuration settings and so forth of an existing online network drive Click this button to conveniently create a duplicate drive profile from the online drive and automatically load t
66. Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value e Parameter 260 Analog In0 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 68 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters B3 0 CEM J F ControlNet Explicit Message L CEN 2 Control Block N15 0 lt DN gt Control Block Length 67 CER Setup Screen lt Using Explicit Messaging 6 55 SLC 500 Controller Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 69 Custom Scattered Read Message Configuration Screen 4 CEM N15 0 67 Elements Data Table Address Receive Data Send Data Receive Data This Controller Message Control Bits 1747 SCNR Slot T Timeout TO Size in Words Receive Data 15 Send Data 15 Eror ER IN70 0 Send Data N60 0 Done DN Target Device Enabled EN Waiting for Slot WS Message Timeout x1 ms 500 Scanner Status ControlNet Addr dec 2
67. Parameter 304 Data In C1 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 28 Using the I O PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L with 700S Control PowerFlex 750 Series and PowerFlex Digital DC Drives When using any of these drives which contain both DINT 32 bit format and REAL floating point format data types you will always read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller first Then if the data value exceeds 16 bits the remaining value will be in the MSW data table address Table 5 L PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives Phase Control 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Not Used N9 2 Speed Feedback LSW N9 3 Speed Feedback MSW N9 4 Value of paramete
68. Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 6 6 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 7 1187 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Read_Response 8 a INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 9 12 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 10 3292 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Read_Response 11 0 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 12 17 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 13 8318 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered _Read_Response 1 4 0 INT Parameter Value MSW In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Read Value 1 Output Freq 32 5 Hz 3 Output Current 0 01 Amp 6 Output Voltage 118 7V AC 12 DC Bus Voltage 329 2V DC 17 Analog In2 Value 8 318 mA Figure 6 17 Example Scattered Read Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Name amp Value Data Type Description Scattered_Read_Response INT 15 Scattered_Read_Response 0 1 INT Parameter Number decimal E Scattered_Read_Response 1 o INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Read_Response 2 16948 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 3 7 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 4 15729 INT Parameter Value LSW af Scattered_Read_Response 5 15605 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 6 137 INT Parameter Number decimal
69. Part Status Indicators Topic Page Components 1 1 Features 1 2 Compatible Products 1 3 Required Equipment 1 3 Safety Precautions 1 5 Quick Start 1 6 20 COMM C Coax Adapter 20 COMN Q Fiber Adapter g le D THC Description Four status indicators that indicate the status of the DPI the adapter and network connection See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting DPI Connector A 20 pin single row shrouded male header An Internal Interface cable is connected to this connector and a connector on the drive 20 COMM C Channel A Coax Receptacle Channel A BNC connection to the network 20 COMM Q Channel A Fiber Receptacles Channel A V pin connection to the network 20 COMM C Channel B Coax Receptacle Channel B redundant BNC connection to the network 20 COMM Q Channel B Fiber Receptacles Channel B redundant V pin connection to the network Node Address Switches Switches to set the node address See Setting the Node Address Switches on page 2 2 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 1 2 Getting Started Features 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P The features of the adapter include the following Typical mounting in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive The 20 COMM C Series B coax adapter firmware 2 xxx or later or 20 COMM Q Series A fiber adapter firmware 2 xxx or later can also be inst
70. Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 125600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 0x6C00 0x6FFF P 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 0 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 1 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Maximum number of faults events that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Fault Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear Fault Event 2 Clear Fault Event Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Trip Instance Read WORD Fault that tripped the device For adapters this value is always 1 when faulted 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ControlNet Objects C 23 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 5 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Number of faults events in the queue A 0 BYTE indicates the fault queue is empty BYTE WORD n 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults WORD Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty 7 Get Fault Parameter Reference WORD Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty
71. Select File gt Save to save the I O configuration file to the PLC 5 40C controller The Save Configuration dialog box appears Save Configuration Either of the following choices will save the updated schedule OK to the file and to the online network if you are online o Save Type Cancel Optimize and re write schedule for all connections fE Help TIP If both Save Type choices are available we recommend to click Optimize and re write schedule for all connections Click OK to download the I O configuration to the controller A warning will appear about communication and I O disruption on the network Click Yes If this is the first time that you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to save the configuration as a file on your computer SLC 500 Controller Example After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple ControlNet network see Figure 4 6 In our example we will configure a SLC 500 controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks over the network 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Figure 4 6 Example SLC 500 Controller ControlNet Network
72. The RSLogix 500 project window reappears Using the I O 5 39 7 In the project treeview right click IO Configuration and choose Open to display the I O Configuration screen 1 0 Configuration Racks 1746 44 4 Slot Rack se 120 Rack Not Installed z 3 170 Rack Not Installed Read I0 Config Any 8pt Discrete Input Module T Current Cards Available Any 16pt Discrete Input Module Any 32pt Discrete Input Module Any 8pt Discrete Output Module Any 16pt Discrete Output Module Any 32pt Discrete Output Module AMCI Series 1500 Resolver Module AMCI Series 1561 Resolver Module Read 10 Configration from Online Processor Driver Route Processor Node EtherNetIP CIP Path 16 12 49 48 46 57 49 46 4 52 Decimal EtherNet IP a 64 Octal Last Configured EtherNet IP Node 52d CIP Path 16 12 49 48 46 57 49 46 49 48_v Reply Timeout i PH Cancel Read I0 Config Help 8 On the I O Configuration screen click Read IO Config to display the Read IO Configuration from Online Processor screen a b C Click Who Active and select the communication path to the processor Click OK Click Read IO Config to list the 1747 SCNR ControlNet Scanner Module Note that the column shows the slot number that the scanner occupies This slot number replaces the e in the memory addresses Close the Read IO Configuration from Online Processor screen 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapte
73. This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 133 144 is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 5 Run 6 Run Forward or 7 Run Reverse 3 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 133 144 is programmed for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 option 17 18 or 19 Note that Reference Select is Exclusive Ownership see drive User Manual for more information 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P D 8 Logic Command Status Words Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 14 3 12 1 Status Description Ready 0 Not Ready Par 1403 1 Ready X Active 0 Not Active Running 1 Active x Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward X Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward X Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating X Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating x Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 1380 1 Alarm X Fault 0 No Fault Par 1351 1 Fault X At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference Local Control 000 Port 0 TB 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port 3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Reserved 111 No Local 1 See Owners in drive User Manual for further information 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Reference Source 0000 Spd Ref A Auto Par
74. Troubleshooting Start Up Status Indications Status indicators for the drive and communication adapter can be viewed on the front of the drive Figure 2 6 after power has been applied Possible start up status indications are shown in Table 2 A Figure 2 6 Drive and Adapter Status Indicators location on drive may vary PORTO MOD O __nerao NETBO Allen Bradley 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 2 8 Installing the Adapter Table 2 A Drive and Adapter Start Up Status Indicators Item o Name STS Status Color State Description Drive STS Indicator Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing An inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be drive stopped started Check drive Parameter 214 Start Inhibits Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring drive running Check drive Parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Check drive running drive Parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing A fault has occurred Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Adapter Status Indicators PORT Green Flashing Normal operation The adapter is establishing an I O connection to the drive It will turn steady green or red Steady Nor
75. XCOMM IO OPT1 the digital inputs and digital outputs are mapped as shown in Figure 8 4 and Figure 8 5 respectively Figure 8 4 I O Board Option Digital Input Mapping Datalink Out D1 Word Bit 1514131211109 876543210 EEEE Status ING NI Figure 8 5 1 O Board Option Digital Output Mapping Datalink In D1 Word Bit 1514131211109876543210 DK L QUTI OUT2 Important On power up or reset the outputs will be in a non activated state To configure the adapter to use the optional I O Board Parameters 13 DPI I O Cfg 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output must be set To send input output data from the optional I O board to the network do the following e Turn on bit 4 1xxxx in Parameter 25 M S Input e Turn on bit 4 1xxxx in Parameter 26 M S Output e Turn off bit 4 Oxxxx in Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg Setting the Datalink D bit 4 in the M S Input and M S Output parameters directs the communication adapter to send Datalink D back to the controller Turning off bit 4 in the DPI I O Cfg parameter directs the communication adapter to not send Datalink D data back to the drive For more information on I O Messaging and Configuring Datalinks see Chapter 5 Using the I O If the I O Board Fault Action Jumper JMP1 is set to the Fault Configurable position Parameter 23 FIt Cfg D1 In i
76. as the Most Significant Word of the 32 bit field 4 Common Logic Sts The present value of the Common Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter 5 Prod Logic Sts The present value of the Product Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter from the controller 6 Feedback The present value of the Feedback being received from the drive by this adapter Note that a 16 bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32 bit field 7 Datalink A1 In The present value of respective Datalink In being transmitted to the 8 Datalink A2 In drive by this adapter If not using a Datalink this parameter should have a value of zero 9 Datalink B1 In 10 Datalink B2 In 11 Datalink C1 In 12 Datalink C2 In 13 Datalink D1 In 14 Datalink D2 In Troubleshooting 7 5 Table 7 A Adapter Diagnostic Items Continued No Name Description 15 Datalink A1 Out The present value of respective Datalink Out being received from the A Weasel 17 Datalink B1 Out and the most significant 16 bits of this diagnostic item are zero 18 Datalink B2 Out 19 Datalink C1 Out 20 Datalink C2 Out 21 Datalink D1 Out 22 Datalink D2 Out 23 DPI Rx Errors The present value of the DPI Receive error counter 24 DPI Rx Error Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Receive error counter 25 DPI Tx Errors The present value
77. bad node configuration e Verify that all node addresses are unique res ng Redo e Check the adapters configuration e Check media for broken cables loose connectors missing terminators etc e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit or reset the adapter Indicator Interpreted Independently Status Cause Corrective Actions One channel LED is That channel is disabled or not Program the network for redundant media if required Steady Off supported One channel LED is Flashing Red Green There is an invalid link configuration for that channel e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit or reset the adapter e Reset the controller e If the problem persists contact Rockwell Technical Support One channel LED is The channel is not receiving network Check media for broken cables loose connectors missing terminators Flashing Red Off activity and so forth One channel LED is A temporary channel error has Verify the controller is present on the network and working Flashing Green Off occurred or the channel is in listen only mode One channel LED is Steady Green Normal operation for that channel No action required 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 7 4 Troubleshooting Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F
78. control logic timing counting report generation communication arithmetic and data file manipulation A controller consists of a central processor input output interface and memory See also Scanner ControlNet Network ControlNet is an open producer consumer communication network with features such as redundant media and deterministic I O timing designed for high performance or time critical requirements More information about ControlNet and the ControlNet specification is available online at http www controlnet org Data Rate The speed at which data is transferred on the ControlNet network fixed at 5 Mbps Datalinks A Datalink is a type of pointer used by PowerFlex 7 Class drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow specified parameters to be read or written to without using explicit messages When enabled each Datalink consumes either four bytes or eight bytes in both the input and output image table of the controller The drive determines the size of Datalinks DPI Drive Peripheral Interface A second generation peripheral communication interface used by various Allen Bradley drives and power products such as PowerFlex 7 Class drives It is a functional enhancement to SCANport DPI Peripheral A device that provides an interface between DPI and a network or user Peripheral devices are also referred to as adapters or modules The 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter 1203 USB or
79. elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 4 Get International Read Full STRUCT of STRINGN International timer text STRUCT Timer value BOOL 16 Timer descriptor 5 Get International Timer Text STRINGN Name of this timer 6 Get Clock Status BOOL 32 Identifies clock status 8 Get Set Number of Leap Seconds INT Identifies the current number of Leap Seconds 9 Get Clock Options BOOL 32 Identifies the optional functionality available in the device s System Clock 10 Get Set Clock Options Enable BOOL 32 Identifies which of the clock s options are enabled 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 30 Host DPI Parameter Object ControlNet Objects Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal Ox9F 159 To access Device parameters use the DPI Parameter Object Class Code 0x93 Important The Host DPI Parameter Object is supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Reserved 16384 _ Class Attributes Adapter 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 16386 Adapte
80. first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone_en html or contact Canada your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better Ifyou have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1
81. flathead screwdriver Q ControlNet cable for details see to the ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET INO002 or the ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET INO01 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 1 4 Getting Started 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Drive and adapter configuration tool such as the following PowerFlex 20 HIM xx HIM RSNetWorx for ControlNet software version 6 00 or later Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later Connected Components Workbench is the recommended stand alone software tool for use with PowerFlex drives You can obtain a free copy by e Internet download at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html e Requesting a DVD at http www ab com onecontact controllers micro800 Your local distributor may also have copies of the DVD available Connected Components Workbench software cannot be used to configure SCANport based drives or Bulletin 160 drives DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later This software tool has been discontinued and is now available as freeware at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html There are no plans to provide future updates to this tool and the download is being provided as is for users that lost their DriveExplorer CD or
82. for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 6 60 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File 4 Data File N40 dec Radix Decimal Symbol Columns 10 Desc N40 Properties Usage Help Figure 6 61 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for get messages of different parameter types in the SLC 500 controller Figure 6 61 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Gets For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives Copy File For 32 bit Integer ig Parameters All est Length PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 50 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F f
83. green and to remove the yellow warning symbols displayed in the treeview under the I O Configuration folder and drive profile follow the procedure in Use RSNetworx for ControlNet Software to Save the I O to the Bridge on page 4 13 Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile All Versions We recommend that you use the basic RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile for only the following reasons 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P A specific drive profile in other versions of RSLogix 5000 software is unavailable Users are already familiar with a drive Generic Profile and do not want to convert an existing project to a Classic Profile versions 13 00 15 00 or to a drive Add on Profile RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later A project must maintain specific revision level control The controller cannot be taken offline RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later enables the drive Generic Profile to be added while the controller is online and in the Run mode Configuring the I O 4 19 Add the Drive Adapter to the I O Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge 1 5 In the treeview right click the bridge and select New Module to display the Select Module screen E Select Module Description 1794 ACN15 C 1794 ControlNet Adapter 1794 ACNR 15 C 1794 ControlNet Adapter Redundant Media
84. have problems then access the Allen Bradley Technical Support website at www ab com support abdrives or contact Rockwell Automation These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation Description PowerFlex 7 Class DPI Drive Peripheral Interface Network Communication Adapter Installation Information on installing PowerFlex 20 COMM x Network Instructions publication 20COMM INO04 Communication Adapters ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET INO02 Information on the required components of a ControlNet coax media system determining your system and installing the required components ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET IN001 Basic information for fiber cable planning and installation Connected Components Workbench website http www ab com support abdrives webupdate Information on the Connected Components Workbench software html and online help software tool and includes a link for free software download DriveExplorer website http www ab com drives driveexplorer and online help 1 Information on using the DriveExplorer software tool DriveExecutive website http www ab com drives drivetools and online help 1 Information on using the DriveExecutive software tool PowerFlex 20 HIM A3 A5 C3S C5S HIM Quick Reference publication 20HIM QR001 Information on using PowerFlex
85. in the bridge You already set the major revision by selecting the bridge series in step 4 Electronic Compatible Keying The Compatible Keying setting for Electronic Keying Keying ensures the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore be sure that you have set the correct revision in this screen See the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings Open When this box is checked clicking OK opens additional module properties Module screens to further configure the bridge When unchecked clicking OK closes Properties the bridge s New Module screen For this example uncheck this box 9 Click OK The bridge is now configured for the ControlNet network and added to the RSLogix 5000 project It appears in the I O Configuration folder In our example a 1756 CNB E bridge appears under the I O Configuration folder with its assigned name 9 8 10 Configuration amp 1756 Backplane 1756 47 fa 0 1756 L63 v20_Example_using_20COMMC a 0 1 1756 CNBJE My_ControlNet_Bridge Zs ControlNet For convenience keep the project open Later in this chapter the project will need to be downloaded to the controller Configuring the I O 4 5 There are three ways to add the adapter into the I O configuration e Drive Add on Profiles RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later e Classic Prof
86. integer regardless of its actual data type Maximum length is 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 20 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 6 21 or Figure 6 24 in the source tag Scattered_Write_Request to write new values to these parameters Drive Parameter Drive Parameter Type 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec REAL 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec REAL 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 DINT 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog In0 Hi 5 5 REAL 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 REAL See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 21 or Figure 6 24 shows the parameter values Figure 6 21 Example Scattered Write Request Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive amp Value Data Type Description Scattered_Write_Request UNTASI Scattered Write_Request 0 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Request 1
87. into the Online mode and the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the window should be flashing green Also a yellow warning symbol should be displayed on the I O Configuration folder in the treeview and on the drive profile because the connections have not yet been scheduled using RSNetWorx for ControlNet software If the controller was in Run Mode before clicking Download RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to change the controller mode back to Remote Run In this case choose the appropriate mode for your application If the controller was in Program Mode before clicking Download this prompt will not appear Select File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 12 Configuring the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P c Click Save to save the configuration to a file on your computer To be sure that the present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload and save the values Correlate the Drive with the Controller You must now correlate the drive settings to the RSLogix 5000 project I O settings so that they match This requires loading the project I O settings into the drive 1 In the treeview under I O Configuration right click the
88. is already in use 12 Type 0 Login The adapter has logged in for Type 0 control 13 Type 0 Time Fit The adapter has not received a Type 0 status message within the specified time 14 DL Login The adapter has logged into a Datalink 15 DL Reject Fit The drive rejected an attempt to log in to a Datalink because the Datalink is not supported or is used by another peripheral 16 DL Time Flt The adapter has not received a Datalink message within the specified time 17 Reserved Not used 18 Control Disabled The adapter has sent a Soft Control Disable command to the drive 19 Control Enabled The adapter has sent a Soft Control Enable command to the drive 20 Message Timeout A Client Server message sent by the adapter was not completed within 1 sec 21 Fit Cfg Error One of the Fit Cfg xx parameters is set to a value greater than 65535 and the drive requires a 16 bit value 22 App CRC Fit Startup sequence detected corrupt application firmware 23 App Updated New application firmware was detected 24 CN Comm Fit The adapter detected a communications fault on the network 25 CN Sent Reset The adapter received a reset from the network 26 CN Close Fit An I O connection from the network to the adapter was closed 27 CN Idle Fit The adapter is receiving idle packets from the network 28 CN Open An I O connection from the network to the adapter has been opened 29 CN Timeout Fit An I O connection from the network to the adapter has tim
89. need to configure legacy products not supported by Connected Components Workbench software DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later A Lite version of DriveExecutive software ships with RSLogix 5000 RSNetWorx MD FactoryTalk AssetCentre and ItelliCENTER software All other versions are purchasable items e 9303 4DTEOLENE Drive Executive software e 9303 4DTSOIENE DriveTools SP Suite includes DriveExecutive and DriveObserver software e 9303 4DTE2S0O1ENE DriveExecutive software upgrade to DriveTools SP Suite adds DriveObserver software DriveExecutive software updates patches and so forth can be obtained at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html It is highly recommended that you periodically check for and install the latest update Q Controller configuration tool such as RSLogix 5 RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5000 software Q A computer connection to the ControlNet network via a communication card such as 1784 PCC 1784 KTCX or 1770 KFC Getting Started 1 5 Safety Precautions Please read the following safety precautions carefully gt BP D gt D ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove all power from the PowerFlex drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing an adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Only personnel familiar with dr
90. noise or data rate mismatch CAN Controller Area Network CAN is a serial bus protocol on which DPI is based CIP Common Industrial Protocol CIP is the transport and application layer protocol used for messaging over EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet networks The protocol is used for implicit messaging real time I O and explicit messaging configuration data collection and diagnostics Connected Components Workbench Software The recommended tool for monitoring and configuring Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters It can be used on computers running various Microsoft operating systems You can obtain a free copy of Connect Components Workbench software at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html ControlFLASH A free software tool used to electronically update firmware of Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters ControlFLASH software is downloaded automatically when the firmware revision file for the product being updated is downloaded from the Allen Bradley updates website to your computer 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P G 2 Glossary 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Controller A controller also called programmable logic controller is a solid state control system that has a user programmable memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as I O
91. of the DPI Transmit error counter 26 DPI Tx Error Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Transmit error counter 27 Node Address SW The present value of the adapter node address switches 28 Boot Flash Count The number of times the boot firmware in the adapter has been updated 29 App Flash Count The number of times the application firmware in the adapter has been updated 30 M S Input Size The size of data transferred from the network to the drive 31 M S Output Size The size of data transferred from the drive to the network 32 OPT Status The operating status of optional I O board in the DPI External Comms Kit For the meanings of the individual bits see Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items on page 8 4 33 OPT RX Errors Number of optional I O board receive errors 34 OPT FW Version Firmware version of optional I O board in DP External Comms Kit 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 7 6 Troubleshooting Viewing and Clearing The adapter has an event queue to record significant events that occur in the Events operation of the adapter When such an event occurs an entry is put into the event queue You can view the event queue with any of these drive configuration tools LCD PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 1 01 or later The eve
92. parameters The 20 COMM C and 20 COMM Q adapter firmware revision 3 001 added support Throughout for use with PowerFlex 750 Series drives revised DPI Parameter Object Class Code Appendix C 0x93 to include Ports 7 through 14 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P soc ii Summary of Changes Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Table of Contents About This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual 0 0 ccc eects P 1 Rockwell Automation Support 0 0 0 eee ccc eee eee een eee P 2 Additional RESOUrCE Sis o cera tin nce we See ww ew Wea N Bee Ot See Oe p 2 Getting Started Components ienie iaeei aii ef eet ees a gts eee Gaede Sadat Pao ete 1 1 Feat res osios ety esc chl eae Len vtec hea Sie ka hs Stee ari ante es RA a ge 1 2 Compatible Products 0 nan cect e ene nee nes 1 3 Required Equipment is ien e peana aisa oE E E E E E E eee e eee ees 1 3 Safety Precautions 2 0 2 no dander pei ma aegis ehh dog whee had E ia io 1 5 QUICK SE aeaa aa wh ta dated dl dates ates da eed bed dened aa 1 6 Installing the Adapter Preparing for an Installation 2 0 ccc eee eens 2 1 Setting the Node Address Switches 0 0 c eee cee eens 2 2 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive 00 0 eee eee eee 2 3 Connecting the Adapter to the Network 0 0
93. rockwellautomation com To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative To find your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative visit http www rockwellautomation com locations For information such as firmware updates or answers to drive related questions go to the Drives Service amp Support website at http www ab com support abdrives and click on the Downloads or Knowledgebase link 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P P 4 About This Manual Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Components Item Chapter 1 Getting Started The adapter is intended for installation into a PowerFlex 7 Class drive and is used for network communication The 20 COMM C Series B coax adapter firmware 2 xxx or later or 20 COMM Q Series A fiber adapter firmware 2 xxx or later can also be installed in an External DPI Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE For PowerFlex 750 Series drives we recommend using the 20 750 CNETC Coaxial ControlNet option module instead of the 20 COMM C adapter However this manual does include information on using the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter with PowerFlex 750 Series drives but there are operating limitations For details see Compatible Products on page 1 3
94. the Control Timeout class attribute 100 has been set to a non zero value ControlNet Objects C 5 Parameter Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxOF 15 Important This object is not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_All 0x05 Yes No Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x4B No Yes Get_Enum_String Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the DPI drive The adapter parameters are appended to the list of drive parameters The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Deseripfion 0 Class Attributes 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes n Last Drive Parameter n Attributes 7 n 1 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes n m Last Adapter Parameter m Attributes 2 1 n represents the number of parameters in the drive m represents the number of parameters in the adapter Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Revision WORD 1 2 Get Max Instance WORD Number of parameters 8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD 0 False 1 True Bit 0 Supports parameter instances Bit 1 Supports full attributes Bit 2 Must do NVS save command Bit 3 Parameters are stored in NVS 9 Get Configuration Assembly Instance WORD 0 10 Set Native
95. the Nonvolatile Storage NVS memory The value is stored in volatile memory and lost when the drive loses power Thus use Datalinks when you need to change a value of a parameter frequently Datalink Scaling PowerFlex 70 700 700H Drives and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control When using RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later Datalink scaling is done automatically However when using RSLogix 5000 software version 15 00 or earlier or when using a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller Datalink scaling is not automatic and uses whole numbers INTs or DINTs See the drive documentation to determine the unit resolution for the associated parameter Datalink For example PowerFlex 700VC drive parameter 3 Output Current has a 0 1 unit resolution Because Datalink scaling uses whole numbers the Output Current value is multiplied by 10 in the adapter and then sent over the network Suppose the actual Output Current value is 35 5 amps Reading the associated parameter Datalink received by the controller the value would be 355 By using ladder logic divide the value by 10 in the controller to get the correct scaling See the drive documentation to determine if the Datalink parameter is a 16 bit or 32 bit parameter 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 12 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L with 700S Control Powe
96. the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 7 When the node address is correctly configured and the adapter is connected to an operational network the NET A status indicator should be steady green or flashing green The I O configuration determines the data that is sent to and from the drive Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks may be enabled or disabled Datalinks allow you to read write directly to parameters in the drive using implicit I O A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O 1 Set the bits in Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM C 0 Logic Command Reference Default Parameter 13 1 Datalink A DPI I O Cig al XXXXKKKKKKXO 0 0 OM 2 Datalink B Cmd Ref b00 3 Datalink C 4 Datalink D 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 2 Ifa controller is used to control the drive set adapter Parameters 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output for Master Slave Hierarchy For details see Setting Master Slave Hierarchy on page 3 4 3 If Logic Command Reference is enabled configure the parameters in the drive to accept the Logic Command and Reference from the adapter For example set Parameter 90 Speed Ref A Sel in a PowerFlex 70 or 700 drive to 22 DPI Port 5 so that the drive uses the Reference from the adapter Also verify that the mask parameters for exampl
97. the devices on the network ControlNet RSNetWorx for ControlNet Eie Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help als u8 T eleele tg al AB x I Edits Enabled The online active keeper is not configured for this network To configure the network click the Edits Enabled checkbox Network Usage Hardware PLC 5 40C PowerFlex 70 1784 PCC Q AC Drive No Drive Object C Communication Adapter El ControlNet to SCANport DC Drive No Drive Object DPI Drives on Fiber ControlNet ji DPI to ControlNet DSI to ControlNet Human Machine Interface Programmable Logic Controller Rockwell Automation miscellaneous een H 4 gt MN Graph Spreadsheet Diagnostics 7 Message Code Date Description one sie4 6 6 2007 10 59 47 Mode changed to online The communication timeout is 3000 msec The online path is USMEQOMWISNIE2 ControiNet cner 2085 6 6 2007 10 59 47 There are no configured keepers that exist on this network The online active keeper status will be checked every 10 sec Messages Online Not Browsing If the icon for the drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC on the network appears as Unrecognized Device you must download the EDS file for that PowerFlex drive from the Rockwell Automation website a Go to the website http www rockwellautomation com resources eds 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Configuring the
98. the procedure in the subsection Use RSNetworx for ControlNet Software to Save the I O to the Bridge on page 4 13 to Change the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the RSLogix 5000 window from flashing green to steady green Remove the yellow warning symbols in the treeview under the I O Configuration folder and drive profile After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple ControlNet network see Figure 4 5 In our example we will configure a PLC 5 40C controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks over the network Figure 4 5 Example PLC 5 Controller ControlNet Network Computer with PowerFlex 70 Drive with ControlNet Connection PLC 5 40C Controller 20 COMM C Adapter a SS HE aA RE 1 Channel A iL ji sanee e a a eee ae oy See TIP Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to this manual where it is applicable Configuring Parameters for Network I O Because the I O for the drive is defined in the next subsection Use RSNetWorx for ControlNet Software to Configure the I O and Save It to the C
99. the screw and drive ground NOTE When installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive see the 20 750 20COMM and 20 750 20COMM F1 Communication Carrier Cards Installation Instructions publication 750COM INO01 supplied with t he card 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 2 6 Installing the Adapter Connecting the Adapter to ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex the Network drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Use static control precautions 3 Connect one end of a ControlNet cable to the network See Figure 2 4 or Figure 2 5 for an example of wiring to a ControlNet network Figure 2 4 Coax Network Wiring Example Controller PowerFlex 7 Class Drives ControlLogix with each with a 20 COMM C Adapter 1756 CNBR Bridge shown J Channel A ae optional redundancy Channel B oN a a im ela Se Figure 2 5 Fiber Network Wiring Example Controller ControlLogix with 1756 CNBR Bridge shown asara ti erers a a oo PowerFlex 7 Class Drives each with 20 COMM Q Adapter
100. version see Allen Bradley Knowledgebase document 65882 Add the Drive Adapter to the I O Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge In this example RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 is used with drive Add on Profile version 4 04 1 In the treeview right click on the bridge and choose New Module to display the Select Module screen 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 6 Configuring the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P In our example we right click on the 1756 CNB E bridge Select Module Type Catalog Module Discovery Favorites Module Type Category Fitters Module Type Vendor Fiters Communication Controller Drive HMI Other Catalog Number lt PoweiFlex 4 C PoweiFlex 4M C PowerFlex 70 EC O Alen Bradley Mettler Toledo Parker Hannifin Corporation Reliance Electric Description AC Drive via 22 COMM C Allen Bradley AC Drive via 22 COMM C Allen Bradley AC Drive via 20 COMM C Allen Bradley AC Drive via 20 COMM O Fiber Allen Bradley PowetFlex 700 AC C Active Converter via 20 COMM C Allen Bradley PoweiFlex 700 AC Q Active Converter via 20 COMM Q Fiber Allen Bradley PowerFlex 7 Vertar2N MRAN AT Drive via MANMM N Allen Rradlew gt 117 of 117 M
101. zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 10 Decimal Places Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 102ecmal Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Object Specific Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Allocation Size in bytes Class Instance Par Number Par Value 0x4D Yes No Get_Attributes_Scattered 4 4 Ox4E Yes No Set_Attributes_Scattered 4 4 The table below lists the parameters for the Get_Attributes_Scattered and Set_Attributes_Scattered object s
102. 0 cee eens 2 6 Applying Power 20h secs perstat os eG es Pee oe eh bene ea oo eet Ph dees 2 7 Commissioning the Adapter 0 0 ccc ect eee eens 2 9 Configuring the Adapter Configuration Tools sessie ierann a Bie E dla dade Riad ete din ede eer 3 1 Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters 0 000005 3 2 Setting the Node Address 2 0 2 0 cc eee E a A ee ene tenes eenenees 3 3 Setting the I O Configuration 0 0 0 cece eect eens 3 3 Setting Master Slave Hierarchy 0 0 0 c cece eee enna 3 4 Setting the Reference Adjustment 0 0 c eect eee 3 5 Setting a Fault Actoni cic acdsee Akin wea ine wet nie wale hea en 3 5 Resetting the Adapter 0 0 ce reri ec e E a Dag ia eens 3 7 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 3 7 Updating the Adapter Firmware 0 0 0 cee ec een eee eee 3 8 Configuring the I O Using RSLinx Classic Software 0 0 cece eee eens 4 1 ControlLogix Controller Example 0 0 0 eee eens 4 2 PLC 5 Controller Example 0 0 0 cee eee eee ene 4 24 SLC 500 Controller Example 0 2 0 eee eens 4 30 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ii Table of Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Appendix A Appendix B Using the I O About I O Messaging 2 0 0 eee ene ene e ene e ee Understanding the I O Image 0 0 0 e
103. 0 PowerFlex 700 and PowerFlex 700H drives to transfer a 32 bit parameter two contiguous drive Datalink parameters for example Data Out A1 A2 B1 B2 and so forth are required To determine if a parameter is a 32 bit parameter see the Parameter section in the drive documentation and look for a 7 symbol in the No column All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32 bit parameters For example parameter 3 Output Current in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32 bit parameter When using a drive that has 32 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 700 VC PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series drives only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter Understanding PLC 5 Controller Data Table Addresses Because the PLC 5 controller is a 16 bit platform and is used with the 32 bit 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter the data will be transposed from the least significant word LSW to the most significant word MSW in the controller When the I O was configured Chapter 4 two available data table addresses N9 0 for input data and N10 0 for output data were used Figure 5 12 shows the data file address structure for this example Figure 5 12 Data File Table for Example Ladder Logic Program i File N9 dec CNET_DATA ControlNet data file Offset Radix Decimal x Symb SSS Columns 10 v 0 0 is 0 0 0 o oo o o v HE N10 0 Radix Decimal x k Columns 10 v Properties
104. 0 Reverse 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accelerating 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decelerating 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 959 and 960 1 Alarm Fault 0 No Fault Par 952 and 953 1 Fault At Setpt Spd 0 Not at Setpoint Speed 1 At Setpoint Speed Manual 0 Manual Mode Not Active 1 Manual Mode Active Spd Ref ID 0 Spd Ref ID 1 Spd Ref ID 2 Spd Ref ID 3 Spd Ref ID 4 00000 Reserved 00001 Auto Ref A Par 545 00010 Auto Ref B Par 550 00011 Auto Preset Speed 3 Par 573 00100 Auto Preset Speed 4 Par 574 00101 Auto Preset Speed 5 Par 575 00110 Auto Preset Speed 6 Par 576 00111 Auto Preset Speed 7 Par 577 01000 Reserved 01001 Reserved 01010 Reserved 01011 Reserved 01100 Reserved 01101 Reserved 01110 Reserved 01111 Reserved 10000 Man Port 0 10001 Man Port 1 10010 Man Port 2 10011 Man Port 3 10100 Man Port 4 10101 Man Port 5 10110 Man Port 6 10111 Reserved 11000 Reserved 11001 Reserved 11010 Reserved 11011 Reserved 11100 Reserved 11101 Man Port 13 embedded ENET 11110 Man Port 14 Drive Logix 11111 Alternate Man Ref Sel 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Reserved Powe
105. 0 DPI Data Out A1 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Reference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Pa
106. 0 protected typed read with 3 address fields OF AA SLC 500 protected typed write with 3 address fields OF Al SLC 500 protected typed read with 2 address fields OF AQ SLC 500 protected typed write with 2 address fields OF 00 Word range read OF 01 Word range write For more information regarding PCCC commands see DF1 Protocol and Command Set Manual publication 1770 6 5 16 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 10 ControlNet Objects N Files N File Description N41 This N file lets you read and write control I O messages You can write control I O messages only when all of the following conditions are true e The adapter is not receiving I O from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner is in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner e The adapter is not receiving peer I O from another adapter e The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read N41 0 Logic Command Word Logic Status Word N41 Reference least significant word Feedback least significant word N41 2 Reference most significant word Feedback most significant word N41 3 Datalink A1 least significant word Datalink A1 least significant word N41 4 Datalink A1 most significant word Datalink A1 most significant word N41 5 Datalink A2 least significant word Datalink A2 least significant word N41 6 Datalink A2 most significant word
107. 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value e Parameter 260 Analog In0 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 36 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters B3 0 CIO J E ControlNet I O Transfer CEN 2 Control CT15 0 CDN gt Setup Screen lt CER Using Explicit Messaging 6 31 PLC 5 Controller Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Figure 6 37 Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens CIO CT15 0 General Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device i CIO CT15 0 To Address Type ControlNet Node dec From Port To Address 2 MultiHop Command Control Bits Communication Command Generic Bi Directional Instance Number Hex 0 Attribute Number Hex This PLC 5 Snd Addr Snd Elems Service Code Hex 4b Ignore if timed out TO Class Number Hex
108. 003F EN P N File N201 N212 N201 0 N201 2 N202 0 N203 0 N203 2 N204 0 N205 0 N205 2 N206 0 N207 0 N207 2 N208 0 N209 0 N209 2 N210 0 N211 0 N211 2 N212 0 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 Description These N files let you read and write values to DPI and Host parameters in Ports 1 14 for example a HIM or adapter as 32 bit double words You can interpret the data in various ways for example 32 bit real 32 bit integer To read a parameter you need to send a message with two elements For example to read parameter 1 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 1 read two elements beginning at N201 2 As another example to read parameters 2 6 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 5 the adapter read ten elements beginning at N209 4 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 in the DPI p
109. 02 PowerFlex 70 EC PowerFlex 7 o 4 05 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 06 1756 EN2ZT A 1756 EN2T A Cancel Help 7 After selecting a valid path to the ControlNet network for this example A ControlNet click OK As the selected ControlNet path is browsed RSNetWorx for ControlNet software creates a graph view window that shows a graphical representation of the devices on the network Configuring the I O 4 15 ControlNet RSNetWorx for ControlNet file Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help aS HS ee alle E g a Bs xl T Edits Enabled Current Current Current Network Update Time ms 5 00 Avg Scheduled Band 251 Connection Memory Usage 0 57 Unscheduled Bytes Per Sec 388318 Peak Scheduled Band 3 79 Network Usage Lal Hardware PowerFlex 70 Controinet i Category AC Drive AC Drive No Drive Object Communication Adapter ControlNet to SCANport DC Drive No Drive Object DPI Drives on Fiber ControlNet DPI to ControiNet DSI to ControiNet Fs Lae H 4 gt M Graph Spreadsheet Diagnostics J Date 6 1 2007 14 14 00 The online scanlist in address 01 slot 00 does not match the online active keeper 6 1 2007 14 13 51 Mode changed to online The communication tmeout is 3000 msec The online path is USMEQOMWISNIE2IEthemet 10 91 6 1 2007 14 13 51 The online active keeper is valid and there is no offline configuration The online active keeper status will be checked
110. 03 04 05 06 07 08 DPI Port Displays the port to which the adapter is connected This will usually be port 5 DPI Data Rate Displays the data rate used by the drive This data rate is set in the drive and the adapter detects it CN Addr Cfg Sets the ControlNet node address used by the adapter when the Node Address switches are set to 00 Updates Parameter 04 CN Addr Act after reset CN Addr Act Displays the actual ControlNet node address used by the adapter CN Rate Cfg Sets the network data rate megabits per second at which the adapter communicates Updates Parameter 06 CN Rate Act after a reset CN Rate Act Displays the actual network data rate megabits per second used by the adapter Ref Fdbk Size Displays the size of the Reference Feedback The drive determines the size of the Reference Feedback Datalink Size Displays the size of each Datalink word The drive determines the size of Datalinks Details Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Type Read Only Values 0 125 kbps 1 500 kbps Type Read Only Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum 99 Type Read Write Reset Required Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 99 Type Read Only Default 0 5 Mbps Values 0 5 Mbps Type Read Write Reset Required Yes Values 0 5 Mbps Type Read Only Values 0 16 bit 1 32 bit Type Read Only Values 0 16 bit 1 32 bit Type Read Only 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adap
111. 05 Data In C2 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 44 Using the I O PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L with 700S Control PowerFlex 750 Series and PowerFlex Digital DC Drives When using any of these drives which contain both DINT 32 bit format and REAL floating point format data types you will always read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller first Then if the data value exceeds 16 bits the remaining value will be in the MSW data table address Table 5 T SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives Phase Control 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Data Table Address Description N9 0 Reserved for scanner status N9 1 Reserved for scanner status N9 2 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 3 Not Used N9 4 Speed Feedback LSW N9 5 Speed Feedback MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 MSW N9 8 Value of parame
112. 08 8 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A 10 decimal will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the A 10 decimal setting 4 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 6 See Table 6 4 on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging 6 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to INT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer the tag Data Type field must be set to DINT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL
113. 0COMM UM003F EN P Chapter 8 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use the adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE The adapter is typically installed in the internal communication slot on the PowerFlex 7 Class drive However an externally mounted adapter may be desired when e The PowerFlex drive is already connected to an existing network such as Remote I O and a second network is desired for a DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software tool data collection and so forth e The PowerFlex drive is remotely located next to some I O devices that also need to be networked The DPI External Comms Kit has an option slot for general purpose network I O that a controller can use Both the drive and I O devices are handled as one node on the network to reduce the network node count Topic Page Installing the Adapter 8 1 I O Board Option 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 8 2 Understanding the I O Image Drive I O Option 8 2 Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I O Data 8 3 Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items 8 4 Installing the Adapter The adapter can be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit Figure 8 1 Mounting and Connecting the Adapter Comms Kit Comms Kit Enclosure Cover Enclosure Base with adapter mounted inside 15 24 cm 6 in Internal Interface Cable connects power supply board in enclosure b
114. 1 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference N10 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 LSW N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 3
115. 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 545 Spd Ref A Sel Port 0 Port 6 Reference Assigns 20 COMM C Q to be used for the Reference 895 Data In A1 Port 0 Accel Time 1 Points to Par 535 in the drive 896 Data In A2 Port 0 Testpoint Sel 1 Points to Par 970 in the drive 897 Data In B1 Port 5 Anlg Outt Hi Points to Par 90 in Port 5 I O module 905 Data Out A1 Port 0 DC Bus Volts Points to Par 11 in the drive 906 Data Out A2 Port 0 Open Loop Fdbk Points to Par 137 in the drive 907 Data Out B1 Port 5 Anlg Out0 Data Points to Par 77 in Port 5 I O module 03 CN Addr Cfg 2 Node address for the adapter 13 DPI I O Cfg xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 25 M S Input xxxi 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 26 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network 1 In this example the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter 20 750 20COMM Communication Carrier Card is installed in Port 6 and a 24V I O module is installed in Port 5 Also Da
116. 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 14 Example Scattered Read Request Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Name Data Type Description _ Scattered_Read_Request INT 15 _ Scattered_Read_Request 0 1 INT Parameter Number decimal a Scattered_Read_Request 1 o INT Pad Word __ Scattered Read Request 2 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 3 3 INT Parameter Number decimal m Scattered_Read_Request 4 o INT Pad Word E Scattered_Read_Request 5 o INT Pad Word 4 Scattered_Read_Request 6 6 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Request 7 o INT Pad Word Scattered _Read_Request 8 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 3 12 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered _Read_Request 10 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 11 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 12 17 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Request 13 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 14 o INT Pad Word Figure 6 15 Example Scattered Read Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Name amp Value Data Type Description Scattered_Read_Request INT 15 Scattered _Read_Request 0 1 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read _Request 1 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 2 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 3 7 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Req
117. 19 o INT Datalink Out D1 MSW H My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 20 o INT Datalink Out D2 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 21 ONT Datalink Out D2 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive O 2 AB CONTR My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data INT 20 Output Image My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 o LINT Logic Command My_PowerFlex_Dri o INT Not Used i 25000 INT Reference LSW ONT Reference MSW o INT Datalink In A1 LSW My PowerFlex_Drive 0 Datal5 16680 INT Datalink In A1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 4430 INT Datalink In A2 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Datal 1909 INT Datalink In A2 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 8 2621 INT Datalink In B1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 9 16664 INT Datalink In B1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 10 INT Datalink In B2 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 11 o INT Datalink In B2 MSW For PowerFlex 7 Class drives the scaling may need to be multiplied by 10 or 100 depending on the parameter For more information see Datalink Scaling on page 5 11 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 22 Using the I O gt TIP When using a drive that has 16 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 and PowerFlex 700H drives to transfer a 32 bit parameter two contiguous drive Datalink parameters for example Data Out A1 A2 B1 B2 and so forth are required To determine if a parameter is a 32 bit parameter see the Parameter section in the drive documentati
118. 2 Name amp Value Data Type Description My_PowerFlex_Drive l t AB CONTR My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data INT 22 Input Image My PowerFlex Drive l Data 0 o INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Dri o INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive I Data 2 1295 INT Logic Status My_PowerFlex_Dri o INT Not Used My_PowerFlex_Di 25000 INT Feedback LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Q INT Feedback MSW h My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 6 26970 INT Datalink Out A1 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 7 17432 INT Datalink Out A1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 8 15562 INT Datalink Out A2 LSW My PowetFlex DrivellDatsl9 5457 INT Datalink Out A2 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 10 o INT Datalink Out B1 LSW My_PowesFlex_Drive l Data 11 16840 INT Datalink Out B1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Di o INT Datalink Out B2 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 13 o INT Datalink Out B2 MSW My_PowerFlex_Dri o INT Datalink Out C1 LSW My_PowerFlex_Dri S o INT Datalink Out C1 MSW H My PowetFlex_Drive z 9 INT Datalink Out C2 LSW PowerFlex 750 Series Drive My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 17 o INT Datalink Out C2 MSW My PowerFlex_Drive l Data 18 o INT Datalink Out D1 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data
119. 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 58 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter B3 0 CEM J E ControlNet Explicit Message L EN o Control Block N13 0 lt DN Control Block Length 67 CER Setup Screen lt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 48 Using Explicit Messaging General Tab SLC 500 Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 59 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screen CEM N13 0 67 Elements end Data Receive Data This Controller DER Message Control Bits 1747 SCNR Slot 1 Timeout TO Size in Words Receive Data 2 Error ER Send Data fo Data Table Address Receive Data N40 0 Done DN Send Data Target Device Enabled EN Waiting for Slot WS Message Timeout x1 ms 500 Scanner Status ControlNet Addr dec gt Scanner Code hex 0 Service Generic Get Attribute Single Service Code hex No errors Class hex 93 dec 147 Instance hex 3 dec 3 Error Attribute hex 9 dec 9
120. 201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P March 2013 Supersedes 20COMM UMO003E EN P August 2007 Copyright 2013 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
121. 3 High Resolution Reference Parameter 308 Module Definition Revision 5 villi Datalink input Data Output Data DriveStatus DriveLogicRst Electronic Keying Disable Keying OutputFreq CommandedFreq Drive Rating 480V 21A Connection Parameters vie Datalinks Data Format Parameters If the revision of your drive is not listed click Create Database button below if drive is online Use Network Reference OutputCurrent 3 AccetTimet 140 OutputCurrent 3 DecelTimet 142 DCBusVoltage 12 HighResRet 308 Fault Code 243 M HighResRef 308 V Sort Input Output selection lists by Parameter Name DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur when improperly using software to configure a drive Parameter names selected for the Input and Output Data appear as member names in the drive Module Defined Data Types and defines necessary Datalink parameters in the RSLogix 5000 project Actual cick Web Update to download the database from data transfer between controler and drive is determined by Datalink the web if drive is offline To match revision and upload the configuration of an online drive click Match Drive parameters You must download configuration to the drive to ensure that the controller drive and communication module configurations are consistent with each other Web Update Match Drive
122. 5 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Pad Word 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 30 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P PLC 5 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters A Generic Bi Directional scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This read message example reads the values of these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter
123. 5000 drive Add on Profiles version 16 00 or later we recommend using the RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profiles to take advantage of their benefits more intuitive time saving and less likely to make ladder logic program errors 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 16 Using the I O Device PowerFlex 70 EC Drive Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile All Versions Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section PowerFlex 750 Series Drive 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q Adapter Parameter Value Description 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM C Q to be used for the Reference 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1
124. 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e PowerFlex 700H drives e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e SMC 50 smart motor controllers Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 16 bit User Configured Settings es k Size in Words Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 A B C D input Output P VO Cfg M S Input M S Output Vv Y 4 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Y Y Yv 6 4 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 Y Vv Y iv 8 6 00114 00114 00114 Y Yv Y V v 10 8 01114 01114 01114 Vv Vv Y v v v 12 10 11111 11111 11111 Table 4 B Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control e PowerFlex Digital DC drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings ee ee Size in Words Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 A B C D input Output PP VO Cfg M S input M S Output Vv Vv 4 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Vv Vv Vv 8 6 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 Vv Vv Y iv 12 10 0 0111 00114 0 0111 Y Yv Y V v 16 14 01114 01114 01114 Vv Y Y v vY v 20 18 11111 11111 11111 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Configuring the I O 4 21 Table 4 C Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following
125. 753 755 F8 1 Table 5 Y Program and SLC 500 Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Command Reference Ladder Logic Program Program Data SLC 500 Data Description Table Address Description Table Address Command Stop B3 20 0 Drive Stop N10 0 0 Command Start B3 20 1 Drive Start N10 0 1 Command Jog B3 20 2 Drive Jog N10 0 2 Command Clear Faults B3 20 3 Drive Clear Faults N10 0 3 Command Forward Reverse XIO B3 20 4 Drive Forward N10 0 4 Command Forward Reverse XIC B3 20 4 Drive Reverse N10 0 5 Speed Reference PowerFlex 70 N30 1 Speed Reference PowerFlex 70 N10 1 PowerFlex 753 755 F8 3 PowerFlex 753 755 N10 2 Important In addition to the Run mode for the processor the scanner also has its own Run mode To change the scanner mode from IDLE to RUN set Bit 10 in data table address O e 0 where e the scanner slot number For this example we set Bit 10 in data table address O 1 0 An example ladder logic program that uses these descriptive controller data table addresses and passes their data to the descriptive program data table addresses is shown in Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 and Figure 5 22 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using the I O 5 49 Figure 5 19 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Status _ Drive Ready Status Ready N9 2 B3 1 FE cr a ck S 0 0 Drive Active Status Active N9
126. C 500 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes made to this manual since its last release August 2007 Description of Changes Page Reformatted document from half size 5 5 x 8 5 in to full size 8 5 x 11 in Throughout Added information about the Connected Components Workbench software manual configuration tool for drives and connected peripherals Added information for use with PowerFlex 750 Series drives Added information for use with PowerFlex Digital DC drives In the Chapter 1 User Supplied Equipment section added the Connected 1 4 Components Workbench software tool and related information Also revised information for DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software tools Revised Figures 2 2 and 2 3 to show PowerFlex 700H S Frames 9 and larger Added 2 4 and 2 5 ground tab details in Figure 2 3 In Chapter 4 added new Using RSLinx Classic section 4 1 Added titles to the controller I O image tables Table 5 A through Table 5 1 for easier 5 3 to 5 8 referral Added footnotes to explicit messaging screen configuration tables for all controller Throughout type examples to clarify required settings for the Size in Words Elements Bytes fields Chapter 6 when reading writing to 16 bit and 32 bit
127. COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 34 Using the I O Figure 5 14 PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Feedback Drive Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 ource N9 1 15123 lt Drive Speed Dest N20 1 0 Feedback RT Greater Than A gt B Source A N9 2 N9 3 Source A N9 2 0 lt 0 lt Source B 0 Source B l Source B 65536 0 0 lt l lt 65536 0 lt F80 0 0 lt Source A N9 2 Source A N9 3 Source 32768 0 O lt O lt 32768 0 lt Source B 32768 0 Source B l Dest F80 32768 0 lt l lt 00s a a ee PowerFlex LIM EQU MOV Lindt Test Equal Move 750 Series LowLim 32767 0 Source A N93 Source N9 2 Drive Speed 32767 0 0 lt O lt Test N9 2 Source B l Dest F80 Feedback 0 lt l lt 0 0 lt High Lim 10 1 0 lt LIM EQU MOV Limit Test Equal Move Low Lim 0 0 0 0 lt Test N9 2 O lt 32767 0 High Lim Less Than A lt B Source A DIV Divide Source A F8 0 0 0 lt Source B 1000 0 1000 0 lt Dest F8 1 0 0 lt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using the I O 5 35 Depending on the drive being used see one of the following subsections for information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling Subsection Page PowerFlex 70 700 700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control 5 9 PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5 10 PowerFlex 753 755 Drives 5 10 Powe
128. D1 Out will show the status of the inputs as a combined decimal value including the status bit 15 For example Figure 8 6 shows inputs that are valid and all on and Figure 8 7 shows inputs that are valid and all off zero Figure 8 6 Valid Inputs All On Datalink Out D1 Word Bit 1514131211109 876543210 32831 decimal 1 0 0 0 0 0 0j 0 O0 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 Status N6 MNI Figure 8 7 Valid Inputs All Off Datalink Out D1 Word Bit 1514131211109 876543210 32768 decimal 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status N6 a M Appendix A Specifications This appendix presents the specifications for the adapter Topic Page Communications A 1 Electrical A 1 Mechanical A 1 Environmental A 2 Regulatory Compliance A 2 Communications Network Protocol ControlNet Data Rate 5 Mbps fixed Media 20 COMM C Coax with BNC connector 20 COMM Q_ Fiber with V pin type connector Connection Limits 20 simultaneous CIP messaging connections Unlimited input only I O connections One of the following connection types e 1 exclusive owner I O connection e Up to 3 redundant owner I O connections e 1 listen only I O connection Requested Packet 5 ms minimum Interval RPI Packet Rate Up to 400 total I O packets per second 200 in and 200 out Drive Protocol DPI Data Rates 125 kbps or 500 kbps Ele
129. Datalink A2 most significant word N41 7 Datalink B1 least significant word Datalink B1 least significant word N41 8 Datalink B1 most significant word Datalink B1 most significant word N41 9 Datalink B2 least significant word Datalink B2 least significant word anann N41 10 Datalink B2 most significant word Datalink B2 most significant word N41 11 Datalink C1 least significant word Datalink C1 least significant word N41 12 Datalink C1 most significant word Datalink C1 most significant word N41 13 Datalink C2 least significant word Datalink C2 least significant word N41 14 Datalink C2 most significant word Datalink C2 most significant word N41 15 _ Datalink D1 least significant word Datalink D1 least significant word N41 16 Datalink D1 most significant word Datalink D1 most significant word N41 17 Datalink D2 least significant word Datalink D2 least significant word N41 18 Datalink D2 most significant word Datalink D2 most significant word N42 This N file lets you read and write some values configuring the port N42 3 Time out read write Time in seconds allowed between messages to the N41 file If the adapter does not receive a message in the specified time it performs the fault action configured in its Comm Fit Action parameter A valid setting is between 1 and 32767 seconds 5 20 seconds is recommended N42 7 Adapter Port Number read only DPI p
130. Datalink In A1 LSW 2 Logic Status 3 Datalink In A1 MSW 3 Feedback 4 Datalink In A2 LSW 4 Datalink Out A1 LSW 5 Datalink In A2 MSW 5 Datalink Out A1 MSW 6 Datalink In B1 LSW 6 Datalink Out A2 LSW 7 Datalink In B1 MSW 7 Datalink Out A2 MSW 8 Datalink In B2 LSW 8 Datalink Out B1 LSW 9 Datalink In B2 MSW 9 Datalink Out B1 MSW 10 Datalink In C1 LSW 10 Datalink Out B2 LSW 11 Datalink In C1 MSW 11 Datalink Out B2 MSW 12 Datalink In C2 LSW 12 Datalink Out C1 LSW 13 Datalink In C2 MSW 13 Datalink Out C1 MSW 14 Datalink In D1 LSW 14 Datalink Out C2 LSW 15 Datalink In D1 MSW 15 Datalink Out C2 MSW 16 Datalink In D2 LSW 16 Datalink Out D1 LSW 17 Datalink In D2 MSW 17 Datalink Out D1 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 LSW 19 Datalink Out D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 8 Using the I O Using Logic Command Status Using Reference Feedback 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Table 5 1 SLC 500 Controller I O Image for Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase II control e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control e PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 755 drives Word
131. Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 10ec mal Places Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 102ecmal Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Object Specific Services Service Code Implemenied for Service Name Allocation Size in bytes Class Instance Par Number Par Value 0x4B Yes No Get_Attributes_Scattered 2 2 0x4C Yes No Set_Attributes_Scattered 2 2 Ox4D Yes No Get_Attributes Scattered 4 4 Ox4e Yes No Set_Attributes Scattered 4 4 1 These services are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive The table below lists the parameters for the Get_Attributes_Scattered and Set_Attributes_Scatter
132. DriveExplorer software find the option module in the treeview and open its Parameters folder e DriveExecutive software find the option module in the treeview expand the module in the tree and open its Parameters folder Idle Action An idle action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when the controller is switched out of run mode T O Data T O data sometimes called implicit messages or input output is time critical data such as a Logic Command and Reference The terms input and output are defined from the controller s point of view Output is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller Logic Command Logic Status The Logic Command is used to control the PowerFlex 7 Class drive for example start stop and direction It consists of one 16 bit word of output to the adapter from the network The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive and are shown in Appendix D Glossary G 5 The Logic Status is used to monitor the PowerFlex 7 Class drive for example operating state and motor direction It consists of one 16 bit word of input from the adapter to the network The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive and are shown in Appendix D Master Slave Hierarchy An adapter configured for a master slave hierarchy exchanges data with the master device Usually a network has one sc
133. EN P If you encounter unexpected communications problems the adapter s diagnostic items may help you or Rockwell Automation personnel troubleshoot the problem Adapter diagnostic items can be viewed with any of these drive configuration tools e LCD PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Diagnostics Device Items e Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later e DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later e DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later Using the HIM to View Adapter Diagnostic Items Step 1 Access parameters in the adapter Example Screen See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters on Main Menu page 3 2 Parameter Press the or GD key to scroll to Diagnostics Device Select Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter Device Item 3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Device Items option Reference Press the or GD key to scroll through the items Table 7 A Adapter Diagnostic Items No Name Description 1 Common Logic Cmd The present value of the Common Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter 2 Prod Logic Cmd The present value of the Product Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter from the controller 3 Reference The present value of the Reference being transmitted to the drive by this adapter Note that a 16 bit value will be sent
134. Feedback PowerFlex 70 Drive My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 4 INT Datalink Out A1 16 bit Speed Feedback and My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 5 INT Datalink Out 42 D talinks My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 6 INT Datalink Out B1 a My_PowerFlex_Drive Data INT Datalink Out B2 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 8 INT Datalink Out C1 My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 3 INT Datalink Out C2 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 10 INT Datalink Out D1 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 11 INT Datalink Out D2 amp DataType Description My_PowerFlex_Drive AB CONTR My_PowerFlex_Drive Data INT 22 Input Image My _PowerFlex_Drive Data 0 INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 1 INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 INT Logic Status My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 3 INT Not Used My _PowerFlex_Drive Data 4 INT FeedBack LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 5 INT Feedback MSW My _PowerFlex_Drive Data 6 INT Datalink Dut 41 LSW E E E er a rt PowerFlex 750 Series Drive y_PowerFlex_Drive l atalink Out My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 INT Datalink Dut A2 MSW 32 bit Speed Feedback and My PowerFlex Drive Data 10 INT Datalink Out B1 LSW Datalinks My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 11 INT Datalink Out B1 MSW My PowerFlex_Drive Data 12 INT Datalink Out B2 LSW My PowerFlex_Drive Data 13 INT Datalink Out B2 MSW My PowerFlex_Drive Data 14 INT Datalink Out C1 LSW My PowerFlex_Drive Data 15 INT Datalink Out C1 MS
135. I O 4 27 On the website search screen in the Network entry field enter the type of network for this example ControlNet which enables the use of the other search fields In the Keyword entry field enter the type of PowerFlex drive for this example PowerFlex 70EC noting that this field is space sensitive Click Search Due to the large number of EDS files this search may take seconds or up to several minutes On the search results screen in the Details amp Download Column click the Download hyperlink for the EDS file Click Save on the File Download screen to save the EDS file to an appropriate location on your computer Launch the EDS Hardware Installation Tool by clicking the Microsoft Windows Start button and selecting Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSLinx Tools gt EDS Hardware Installation Tool Follow the screen prompts to add the EDS file for use with your project Reboot the computer and repeat steps 1 through 7 at the beginning of this subsection The Unrecognized Device icon in the RSNetWorx for ControlNet graph view window in step 7 should have been replaced by a drive icon for this example the icon for a PowerFlex 70 EC drive Select Network gt Enable Edits or check the Edits Enabled box in the RSNetWorx for ControlNet project window If the PLC 5 40C controller has a different I O configuration than the configuration now being saved the Online Offline mismatch dialog box will appe
136. In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 56 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 6 56 Example Write Single Request Data File 2 Data File N50 dec Radix Decimal Columns 10 Properties Usage Help Figure 6 57 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages of different parameter types in the SLC 500 controller Figure 6 57 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives N51 2 N50 0 For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 16990 lt Dest N50 1 16990 lt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 47 SLC 500 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6
137. Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of WORD Fault code STRUCT of Fault source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRING 16 Fault text STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used WORD Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of WORD Fault code STRUCT of Fault source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 2 Get International Fault Text STRINGN Text describing the fault with support for Unicode 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 24 ControlNet Objects DPI Alarm Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x98 152 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for alarms or warnings Adapters do not support this object Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of alarms supported by the queue The maximum number of alarms can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2
138. M For 16 bit processors such as PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers the data requires manipulation to set a speed Reference above 32767 or below 32767 Please see the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO003 in the Chapter 1 Communications section Then go to the PLC 5 or SLC System subsection and see the Reference Feedback Programming sub subsection Using Datalinks Using the I O 5 11 PowerFlex Digital DC Drives The Reference Feedback value is 25000 Maximum Reference Speed The maximum Reference speed is set using drive parameter 45 Max Ref Speed A Datalink is a mechanism used by PowerFlex drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow a drive parameter value to be read or written without using an Explicit Message When enabled each Datalink occupies two 16 bit or 32 bit words in both the input and output image Use adapter Parameter 08 Datalink Size to determine whether the drive uses 16 bit or 32 bit words for Datalinks Rules for Using Datalinks e Each set of Datalink parameters in a PowerFlex drive can be used by only one adapter If more than one adapter is connected to a single drive multiple adapters cannot use the same Datalink e Parameter settings in the drive determine the data passed through the Datalink mechanism See the documentation for your drive e When you use a Datalink to change a value the value is not written to
139. MDs PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result data params USINT results USINT 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Message Structure for Execute_DH ControlNet Objects C 9 Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description DLink UINT Destination Link ID DLink UINT Destination Link ID DSta USINT Destination Station number DSta USINT Destination Station number DUser USINT Destination User number DUser USINT Destination User number SLink UINT Source Link ID SLink UINT Source Link ID SSta USINT Source Station number SSta USINT Source Station number SUser USINT Source User number SUser USINT Source User number CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for all CMDs EXT_STS USINT Extended status not used for all CMDs PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result data params USINT results USINT The adapter supports the following PCCC command types CMD FNC Description 0x06 0x03 Identify host and some status OF 67 PLC 5 typed write OF 68 PLC 5 typed read OF 95 Encapsulate other protocol OF A2 SLC 50
140. Member hex 0 dec fo Error Code hex 0 Eror Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Example Value 1747 SCNR Slot Size in Words Receive Data Data Table Address Receive Data Message Timeout ControlNet Addr Service 1 Class Instance Attribute 2 1 9 3 N40 0 500 2 Generic Get Attribute Single 93 or 9F Hex 3 Dec 9 Dec Description The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Number of words to be received read Each word size is a 16 bit integer An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file The time in milliseconds that the message must be completed The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 To read a para
141. Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW 8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW 14 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Pad Word 64 Parameter Value LSW 65 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW Figure 6 11 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Pad Word 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word Using Explicit Messaging 6 13 Read Multiple
142. Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Not Used 1 Pad Word 2 Reference LSW 2 Logic Status 3 Reference MSW 3 Not Used 4 Datalink In A1 LSW 4 Feedback LSW 5 Datalink In A1 MSW 5 Feedback MSW 6 Datalink In A2 LSW 6 Datalink Out A1 LSW 7 Datalink In A2 MSW 7 Datalink Out A1 MSW 8 Datalink In B1 LSW 8 Datalink Out A2 LSW 9 Datalink In B1 MSW 9 Datalink Out A2 MSW 10 Datalink In B2 LSW 10 Datalink Out B1 LSW 11 Datalink In B2 MSW 11 Datalink Out B1 MSW 12 Datalink In C1 LSW 12 Datalink Out B2 LSW 13 Datalink In C1 MSW 13 Datalink Out B2 MSW 14 Datalink In C2 LSW 14 Datalink Out C1 LSW 15 Datalink In C2 MSW 15 Datalink Out C1 MSW 16 Datalink In D1 LSW 16 Datalink Out C2 LSW 17 Datalink In D1 MSW 17 Datalink Out C2 MSW 18 Datalink In D2 LSW 18 Datalink Out D1 LSW 19 Datalink In D2 MSW 19 Datalink Out D1 MSW 20 Datalink Out D2 LSW 21 Datalink Out D2 MSW The Logic Command is a 16 bit word of control data produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter The Logic Status is a 16 bit word of status data produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller PowerFlex 750 Series drives have a 32 bit Logic Command Status but when using a 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter only the first 16 bits can be used This manual contains the bit definitions for most compatible products available at the time of publication in Appendix D Logic Command S
143. Parameters ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version A Scattered Read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters Up to 22 parameters can be read This read message example reads the values of these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value e Parameter 260 Analog In0 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Table 6 F Example Controller Tags to Read Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Read Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute_Scattered_Read_Message BOOL MSG Scattered_Read_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 12 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters Execute_Scattered_Read_Message MSG JE Message LCEN Message Control Scattered_Read_Message
144. PowerFlex 4 Class drives and legacy drives that implement the SCANport communication interface Information about DriveTools SP software can be accessed at http www ab com drives drivetools EDS Electronic Data Sheet Files Simple text files that are used by network configuration tools such as RSNetWorx for ControlNet software to describe products so that you can easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a product device type and revision EDS files for many Allen Bradley products can be found at http www ab com networks eds Explicit Messaging Explicit Messages are used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates They are typically used to configure monitor and diagnose devices over the network Fault Action A fault action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when a communication fault for example a disconnected cable occurs or when the controller is switched out of run mode The former uses a communication fault action and the latter uses an idle fault action Fault Configuration When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond with a user defined fault configuration The user sets the data that is sent to the drive using specific fault configuration parameters in the adapter When a fault action parameter is set to use the fault configuration data and a fault occurs the data from these parameters is sent as t
145. PowerFlex ControlNet Adapters Allen Bradley 20 COMM C Coax Series A FRN 2 xxx Series B FRN 3 xxx 20 COMM Q Fiber Series A FRN 3 xxx User Manual Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at_http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by R
146. SLogix Emulate 5 500 Getting Results Guide publication EMULAT GR002 and online help Information on installing and navigating the RSLogix Emulate software for ladder logic programming with Allen Bradley PLC 5 and SLC 500 processors RSLogix 500 Getting Results Guide publication LG500 GR002 and online help Information on using the RSLogix 500 software tool RSLogix 5000 PIDE Autotuner Getting Results Guide publication PIDE GR001 and online help 1 Information on using the RSLogix 5000 software tool RSNetWorx for ControlNet Getting Results Guide publication CNET GR001 and online help Information on installing and navigating the RSNetWorx for ControlNet software effectively using it and accessing and navigating the online help ControlNet Network Configuration User Manual publication CNET UM001 Information on using ControlNet communication modules with the Logix 5000 controller ControlNet PLC 5 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1785 UM022 Information on installing 1785 L20C15 1785 L40C15 1785 L46C15 and 1785 L80C15 programmable controllers and configuring and using their features SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style User Manual publication 1747 UM011 The online help is installed with the software Information on installing the controller and an overview of the SLC 500 programmable controller system Documentation can be obtained online at http literature
147. SW 13 Datalink In C1 MSW 13 Datalink Out B2 MSW 14 Datalink In C2 LSW 14 Datalink Out C1 LSW 15 Datalink In C2 MSW 15 Datalink Out C1 MSW 16 Datalink In D1 LSW 16 Datalink Out C2 LSW 17 Datalink In D1 MSW 17 Datalink Out C2 MSW 18 Datalink In D2 LSW 18 Datalink Out D1 LSW 19 Datalink In D2 MSW 19 Datalink Out D1 MSW 20 Datalink Out D2 LSW 21 Datalink Out D2 MSW PLC 5 Controller Image The I O image for the PLC 5 controller changes depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and Datalinks and the number of Datalinks used Table 5 D Table 5 E and Table 5 F show the I O image when using various PowerFlex drives and all Datalinks enabled Using the I O 5 5 Table 5 D PLC 5 Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control SMC Flex smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e SMC 50 smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700H drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Reference 1 Feedback 2 Datalink In A1 2 Datalink Out A1 3 Datalink In A2 3 Datalink Out A2 4 Datalink In B1 4 Datalink Out B1 5 Datalink In B2 5 Datalink Out B2 6 Datalink In C1 6 Datalink Out C1 7 Datalink In C2 7 Datalink Out C2 8 Datalink In D1 8 Datalink Out D1 9 Datal
148. SW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 Data Out B2 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 Data Out C1 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 Data Out C1 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 Data Out C2 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 Data Out C2 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 Data Out D1 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 Data Out D1 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 Data Out D2 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference N10 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 Data In A1 LSW N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 Data In A1 MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 Data In A2 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 Data In A2 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 Data In B1 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 Data In B1 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 Data In B2 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 Data In B2 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 Data In C1 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 Data In C1 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 615 Data In C2 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Para
149. Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive 2 Data File N90 dec Radix Decimal zj Columns 10 Help Properties Usage The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the 16 bit integer or REAL values to the N90 integer array Figure 6 79 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer the data remains split into two 16 bit integers since there are no 32 bit integers in the SLC 500 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 62 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P controller If the parameter data type is a REAL the floating point value in the SLC 500 controller is copied COP to two 16 bit integers Then the MSW most significant word and LSW least significant word must be swapped before moving MOV the values to the array to be written to See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL Figure 6 79 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 780 PTP Setpoint PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Parameter 536 Accel Time 2 26214 lt N90 1 26214 lt Using Explicit Messaging 6 63 Figure 6 80 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Data File
150. Start 1 Start Jog 1 2 0 Not Jog 1 Par 556 1 Jog 1 Clear Fault 9 f0 Not Clear Fault 1 Clear Fault Unipolar 00 No Command Direction 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control Manual 0 Not Manual 1 Manual Reserved Accel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Time 1 Par 535 10 Use Accel Time 2 Par 536 11 Use Present Time xX X Decel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Time 1 Par 537 10 Use Decel Time 2 Par 538 11 Use Present Time x Ref Select 1 000 No Command X Ref Select 2 001 Ref A Select Par 545 Ref Select 3 010 Ref B Select Par 550 x ELOGE 011 Preset 3 Par 573 100 Preset 4 Par 574 101 Preset 5 Par 575 110 Preset 6 Par 576 111 Preset 7 Par 577 X Reserved 1 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive 2 ANot Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Jog 1 Jog 2 condition will jog the drive A transition to a 0 will stop the drive 3 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P D 6 Logic Command Status Words Logic Bits Logic Status Word 31 15 14 13 12 11 Command x Run Ready Description 0 Not Ready to Run Par 933 1 Ready to Run Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Command Direction
151. TO Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run CO Eror ER This PLC 5 PLC 5 Data Table Address 50 0 Target Device Local ControlNet Node 2 Size in Elements 1 Port Number 2 Error Description No errors Done DN Transmitting ST Enabled EN Error Error Code Hex 0 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Example Value Description Command type for controller to write data to the drive General Tab Communication Command CIP Generic Service Code 10 Hex Class Number 93 or 9F Hex Instance Number 8c Hex Attribute Number 2 QorA Hex PLC 5 Data Table Address N50 0 Size in Elements 14 Port Number 2 Local ControlNet Node 2 Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Controller port to which the ControlNet network is connected The node address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 To write to a parameter in another port see DPI Param
152. W My _PowerFlex_Drive Data 16 INT Datalink Out C2 LSW My PowerFlex_Drive Data 17 INT Datalink Out C2 MSW My PowerFlex_Drive Data 18 INT Datalink Out D1 LSW My PowerFlex_Drive Data 19 INT Datalink Out D1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 20 INT Datalink Out D2 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 21 INT Datalink Out D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 18 Using the I O Figure 5 6 ControlLogix Output Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 2 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 4 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 5 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 8 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 2 My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 4 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 5 My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 8 My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 10 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 11 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 12 My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 13 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Dataf1
153. W 9 Datalink Out B1 MSW 10 Datalink Out B2 LSW 11 Datalink Out B2 MSW 12 Datalink Out C1 LSW 13 Datalink Out C1 MSW 14 Datalink Out C2 LSW 15 Datalink Out C2 MSW 16 Datalink Out D1 LSW 17 Datalink Out D1 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 LSW 19 Datalink Out D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 4 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Table 5 C ControlLogix Controller I O Image for Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile These products include the following e PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase Il control PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control e PowerFlex 755 drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Not Used 1 Pad Word 2 Reference LSW 2 Logic Status 3 Reference MSW 3 Not Used 4 Datalink In A1 LSW 4 Feedback LSW 5 Datalink In A1 MSW 5 Feedback MSW 6 Datalink In A2 LSW 6 Datalink Out A1 LSW 7 Datalink In A2 MSW 7 Datalink Out A1 MSW 8 Datalink In B1 LSW 8 Datalink Out A2 LSW 9 Datalink In B1 MSW 9 Datalink Out A2 MSW 10 Datalink In B2 LSW 10 Datalink Out B1 LSW 11 Datalink In B2 MSW 11 Datalink Out B1 MSW 12 Datalink In C1 LSW 12 Datalink Out B2 L
154. Write_Message MSG J Message CEN Message Control Single_Write_Message __ KC DN gt LCER Configuration Tab Message Type Service Type Service Code 1 Class Instance 2 Attribute 9 Source Element Source Length Co Using Explicit Messaging 6 11 ntrolLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version Figure 6 9 Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Configuration Communication Tag Enable Eror Code Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single_Write_Message Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Message Type cir Generic Service Source Element Type Accel_Time_1 2055 New Tag Set Attribute Single x Source Length Hex Bytes Service Code iy Instance 140 Hex Class 93 Attribute 9 Hex Enable Waiting Extended Eror Code Stat Done Done Lenath 0 J Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text cmos The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Example Value CIP Generic Set Attribute Single 10 Hex 93 or 9F Hex 140 Dec
155. a In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 MSW Using the I O 5 31 Table 5 0 PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Speed Feedback N9 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 Data Out A1 LSW N9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 Data Out A1 MSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 Data Out A2 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 Data Out A2 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 Data Out B1 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 Data Out B1 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 Data Out B2 L
156. a aes C 28 Host DPI Parameter Object 0 0 0 rernu arreen C 30 Logic Command Status Words PowerFlex 70 700 700H and 700L with 700 Control Drives 04 D 1 PowerFlex 700S Phase II Control and 700L with 700S Control Drives D 3 PowerFlex 750 Series Drives eeror 0 0 tio Spa eee e ene ens D 5 PowerFlex Digital DC Drives 0 0 0 cece ence eee D 7 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P iv Table of Contents Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Conventions Used in This Manual Preface About This Manual Topic Conventions Used in This Manual Page P 1 Rockwell Automation Support P 2 Additional Resources P 2 This manual provides information about the adapter and using it with PowerFlex 7 Class Architecture Class drives The adapter can be used with other products that support a DPI adapter such as the DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE See the documentation for your product for specific information about how it works with the adapter The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Parameter names are shown in the format Parameter xx The xx represents the parameter number The represents the parameter name for example Parameter 01 DPI Port e Menu commands are shown in bold type face and follow the format Menu gt Command For example
157. a product that supports Allen Bradley DPI not support Allen Bradley DPI communications communications for example a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Flashing Green The adapter is establishing an I O connection to No action required Normal behavior if no DPI I O is enabled the drive Steady Green The adapter is properly connected and is No action required communicating with the drive MOD Status Indicator This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the adapter as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The adapter is not powered or is not properly e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface connected to the drive ribbon cable e Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Flashing Red The adapter has failed the firmware test e Clear faults in the adapter The adapter firmware is being updated e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit e f cycling power does not correct the problem the adapter parameter settings may have been corrupted Reset defaults and reconfigure the adapter e f resetting defaults does not correct the problem update the adapter with the latest firmware revision Steady Red The adapter has failed the hardware test e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit e Replace the adapter Flashing Green The adapter is op
158. adapter A contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 5 2 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 2 2 Installing the Adapter Setting the Node Address Switches 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Set the adapter Node Address switches Figure 2 1 by rotating the switches to the desired value for each digit Important Each node on the ControlNet network must have a unique address Set the node address before power is applied because the adapter uses the node address it detects when it first receives power To change a node address you must set the new value and then remove and reapply power to or reset the adapter Figure 2 1 Setting Adapter Node Address Switches 2 Tens Digit 3 Ones Digit o o 20 COMM C coax A A adapter shown Setting Description 00 If the Node Address switches are set to 00 Program the adapter uses the value stored in Parameter 03 CN Addr Cfg for the node address See Setting the Node Address on page 3 3 01 99 Node address used by the adapter The default
159. alled in a DPI External Comms Kit and used with the kit s optional I O board See Chapter 8 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE for more information DPI External Comms Kit Compatibility Adapter Operation With Firmware DPI External Comms Kit Optional I O Board Type Series Revision 20 XCOMM DC BASE 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 20 COMM C A 1 Xxx No No coaxial 2 XXX Yes No B 1 XXX No No 2 xxx and later Yes Yes 20 COMM Q A 1 XXxXx No No fiber 2 Xxx and later Yes Yes Captive screws to secure and ground the adapter to the drive or when mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit to the kit s metal enclosure Compatibility with various configuration tools to configure the adapter and connected host drive including the following tools PowerFlex HIM Human Interface Module on the drive if available Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later Switches to set a node address before applying power to the PowerFlex drive or you can disable the switches and use an adapter parameter to configure the node address Status indicators that report the status of the drive communications the adapter and network They are visible when the drive cover is open or closed Parameter configured I O Logic Command Reference and up to four pairs of Datalinks to acco
160. and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Feedback PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Feedback 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 20 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Figure 5 9 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Command Reference Command_Stop My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 0 JE Command_Start My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 0 1 JE Command_Jog My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 0 2 PowerFlex 70 JE and PowerFlex 750 Series Command_Clear_Faults My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 0 3 Drives J Command_Forward_Reverse My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 0 4 Command_Forward_Reverse My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 0 5 JF MOV Move Source Speed_Reference PowerFlex 70 0e Drive Speed Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 1 AA Reference co Copy File PowerFlex Source Speed_Reference 750 Series Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 2 Drive Speed Length 2 Reference Example Datalink Data The Datalink data used in the example program is shown in Figure 5 10 Note that to describe the parameters to which the Datalinks are assigned you may want to add descriptions to the automatically created generic controller tags or create a User Defined Data Types UDDT Using the I O 5 21 Figure 5 10 ControlLogix Example Datalinks for Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Ge
161. anner which is the master device and all other devices for example drives connected to ControlNet adapters are slave devices On a network with multiple scanners called a multimaster hierarchy each slave device must have a scanner specified as a master Node Address A unique address that identifies each node on a ControlNet network The valid range of ControlNet addresses is 1 99 The ControlNet adapter uses two rotary switches to set the ControlNet address or when the switches are set to 00 uses a parameter to set the node address The adapter reads the values of the switches only at power up NVS Nonvolatile Storage NVS is the permanent memory of a device Devices such as the adapter and drive store parameters and other information in NVS so that they are not lost when the device loses power NVS is sometimes called EEPROM PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command PCCC is the protocol used by some controllers to communicate with devices on a network Some software products for example DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software also use PCCC to communicate Ping A message that is sent by a DPI product to its peripheral devices They use the ping to gather data about the product including whether it can receive messages and whether they can log in for control PowerFlex 7 Class Architecture Class Drives The Allen Bradley PowerFlex 7 Class family of drives supports DPI and at the time of pub
162. ant word LSW and Datalink A2 Out will contain the most significant word MSW 32 bit data is stored in binary as follows MSW 2 through 2 LSW 215 through 2 In this example the parameter 10 Elapsed Run Time value of 6553 9 Hrs is read as 6553 9 in Datalink A1 Out Parameter 310 and Datalink A2 Out Parameter 311 Datalink Word Parameter Data Hex A1 Out LSW 10 0003 A2 Out MSW 10 0001 Conversion Example Parameter 010 Elapsed Run Time 6553 9 Hrs MSW 0001 y 0001 binary 2 65536 LSW 0003p 3 Engineering Value 65536 3 65539 Parameter 10 Displayed Value 6553 9 Hrs Example Ladder Logic Program Information Using the I O 5 13 Regardless of the Datalink combination Datalink x1 Out will always contain the LSW and Datalink x2 Out will always contain the MSW In the following example the PowerFlex 70 drive parameter 242 Power Up Marker contains a value of 88 4541 hours Datalink Word Parameter Data Hex A2 Out MSW 242 000D B1 Out LSW 242 7F3D Conversion Example Parameter 242 Power Up Marker 88 4541 hours MSW 000Dhex 1101 binary 2 2 8 2 851968 LSW 7F3Dhex 32573 Engineering Value 851968 32573 884541 Parameter 242 Displayed Value 88 4541 Hrs The example ladder logic programs in the sections of this chapter are intended for and operate PowerFlex 7 Class drives Functions of the Example Programs The exa
163. ar Online Offline mismatch There are differences between the online and offline configurations that prevent RSNet Worx from starting edits Upload or download the network configuration Options OK C Use online data upload Use offline data download Cancel Help a When both Options choices are available click Use offline data download When this choice is dimmed grayed out you must select Use online data upload Click OK TIP If a message box reports that the download cannot be completed because the controller is not in Program mode click Change Mode to place the controller in Remote Run mode and continue the download 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 28 Configuring the I O 9 In the RSNetWorx for ControlNet graph view window right click the PLC 5 40C icon and choose Scanlist Configuration to display the Scanlist Configuration screen Y Address 01 PLC 5 40C Scanlist Configuration File Edit View Network Device Connection Help Wo ti t All W Edits Enabled Curent Pending Curent Pending Curent Pending Curent oO Entries Used Oof 96 Oof 96 Data Input File Usage 0 00 0 00 Discrete Input Usage 6 25 6 25 Configuration File Usage 0 00 Memory Usage 0 02 0 02 Data Output File Usage 0 00 0 00 Discrete Output Usage 6 25 6 25 Resource U lalx ATP Node Memory Usage Node Network Usage A Overall Networ
164. arameter assigned to Parameter 615 Data In C2 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 615 Data In C2 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 Data In D1 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 Data In D1 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 Data In D2 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 48 Using the I O To operate any drive and view its status using the data table addresses Human Machine Interface devices Panel View and so forth or a ladder logic program you will need to create descriptive controller data table addresses Table 5 X and Table 5 Y and a ladder logic program that will pass the controller address data to the program data table addresses Table 5 X SLC 500 and Program Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Status Feedback Ladder Logic Program SLC 500 Data Program Data Description Table Address Description Table Address Drive Ready N9 2 0 Status Ready B3 1 0 Drive Active N9 2 1 Status Active B3 1 1 Actual Direction X10 N9 2 3 Status Forward B3 1 3 Actual Direction XIC N9 2 3 Status Reverse B3 1 4 Drive Faulted N9 2 7 Status Faulted B3 1 7 Drive At Speed N9 2 8 Status At Speed B3 1 8 Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 N9 3 Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 N20 1 PowerFlex 753 755 N9 4 PowerFlex
165. arameter data to NVS See the attention on page 6 1 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P ControlNet Objects C 19 Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 1 Data Type Bit 2 000 BYTE used as an array of Boolean i 001 WORD used as an array of Boolean a Pata Type setts 010 BYTE 8 bit integer 011 WORD 16 bit integer 100 DWORD 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not unicode or 16 bits unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 Unsigned 1 Signed 4 Hidden 0 Visible 1 Hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 Parameter can sink a link 1 Parameter cannot sink a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled for example drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute For more information see the definition of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place
166. as the network configuration type 4 Click OK 5 Select Network gt Online to display the Browse for Network screen Browse for Network Select a communications path to the desired network I Autobrowse _Retresh_ 5 Workstation USMEQOMWISNIE2 gs Linx Gateways Ethernet ControlNet ControlNet ds Ethernet Ethernet d EtherNet IP Ethernet 25 Serial DH 485 as USB Data Highway Plus 6 Expand the communication path from your computer to the PLC 5 40C controller 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 26 Configuring the I O The following screen shows our example navigating to devices that are on a ControlNet network Depending on the communication link you are using the navigation path may be different Browse for Network Select a communications path to the desired network V Autobrowse _Retesh_ Ej Workstation USMEQOMWISNIE2 a5 Linx Gateways Ethernet Sig ControiNet ControlNet 01 PLC 5 40C E 02 Powerflex 70 EC PowerFlex 70EC 240V 4 2 99 Workstation 1784 PCC ds Ethernet Ethernet ds EtherNet IP Ethernet By Serial DH 485 25 USB Data Highway Plus 7 After selecting a valid path to the ControlNet network for this example ControlNet ControlNet click OK As the selected ControlNet path is browsed RSNetWorx for ControlNet software creates a graph view window that shows a graphical representation of
167. ase to adapter For more information see the DPI External Communications Kit Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO01 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 8 2 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE I O Board Option 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 Understanding the I O Image Drive I O Option 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P The I O Board option when installed in the DPI External Comms Kit can be used with only a Series B adapter firmware revision 3 xxx or later The T O Board provides six DC inputs and two Relay outputs for use by a controller on the network Figure 8 2 1 0 Connector Function Descriptions eA 9 10 11 al ii a oue N2 Bae COM 01 COM ow 01 NO uT INPUT COM For more information see the I O Board Option Installation Instructions publication 20COMM IN002 The data for the optional I O Board is sent over the I O connection using Datalink D When the optional I O Board is installed in the DPI External Comms Kit Datalink D is dedicated only for this function and is not available for other uses When the adapter detects the presence of the optional I O Board the I O image is modified as shown in Figure 8 3 Figure 8 3 Example I O Image Datalink D Dedicated to I O Board and All I O Enabled
168. ation Communication Tag Name Configuration Communication Tag Scattered_Write_Message Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type Service Type Service Code Instance Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text fcir Generic Custom Source Length 30 4c Hex Class 0 Attribute Enable Waiting Extended Eror Code Start Source Element Destination v Scattered_write_Req Mi Bytes Scattered_Write_Res x New Tag The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters Configuration Tab Message Type Service Type Service Code 1 Class Instance Attribute Source Element Source Length Destination Example Value CIP Generic Custom 4c Hex 93 or 9F Hex 0 Dec 0 Hex Scattered_Write_Request 30 4 Scattered_Write_Response Description Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Required for scattered messages Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Required for scattered messages Required for scattered messages Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of se
169. available services you should use are Get Attribute Single Get Attribute All Set Attribute Single or Set Attribute All using a CIP Generic communication command PLC 5 xxC controllers Series F revision C or later provide available message services for Get Attributes Scattered and Set Attributes Scattered using a Generic Bi Directional communication command PLC 5 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A read message is used to read a single parameter The specific N40 0 address shown in this read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Figure 6 26 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter B3 0 CIO A IE aE ControlNet I O Transfer CEN Setup Screen lt ER gt o Control CT13 0 DN 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 24 Using Explicit Messaging PLC 5 Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Figure 6 27 Read Single Message Configuration Screen i CIO CT13 0 Command Communication Command CIP Generic Service Code Hex fe Class Number Hex fa Instance Number Hex 3 Attribute Number Hex B This PLC 5 Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run CO Error ER Done DN PLC 5 Data Table Address Transmitting ST Enabled EN
170. ber of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference If the Parameter parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable 1 The referenced parameter must always be writable including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero If
171. ceB 32767 0 65536 0 32767 0 lt 65536 0 lt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 38 Using the I O SLC 500 Controller Example Creating an RSLogix 500 Project Version 7 00 or Later 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create discrete I O instructions in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Also COP instructions must be included in the ladder logic program to convert the default memory addresses in Configuring the I O Chapter 4 to data table addresses 1 Start RSLogix 500 software The RSLogix 500 window appears 2 Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Select Processor Type Processor Name EXSMPLE 1747 L553B C_5705 CP K 05501 Series Cancel 1747 L5S2B C 5 705 Series 1747 LSS1B C 5 05 Series Help 5705 5705 5705 705 705 5705 5704 5704 5704 1747 L543 5704 1747 L542B 5704 CPU Series Series Series PEP ORTERARTH ED 32K Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout Ethernet v 149 DAMA Who Active 10 Sec 61 Octal 3 Assign a name for the processor 4 In the list select the appropriate processor for this example 1747 L552C 5 05 5 Choose the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application 6 Click OK
172. criptor see page C 19 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value in NVS 9 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory Valid only for DPI drives 11 Get Set DPI Link BYTE 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance WORD ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 19 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name 16 Get Parameter Processing Error BYTE 0 No error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 18 ControlNet Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 18 Get International DPI Offline STRUCT of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 19 Get International DPI Online STRUCT of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 20 Get International DPI Online STRUCT of Read Full BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online ma
173. cting Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSLinx Tools gt EDS Hardware Installation Tool Follow the screen prompts to add the EDS file for use with your project 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 34 Configuring the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 9 Reboot the computer and repeat steps 1 through 7 at the beginning of this subsection The Unrecognized Device icon in the RSNetWorx for ControlNet graph view window in step 7 should have been replaced by a drive icon for this example the icon for a PowerFlex 70 EC drive Select Network gt Enable Edits or check the Edits Enabled box in the RSNetWorx for ControlNet project window If the 1747 SCNR scanner has a different I O configuration than the configuration now being saved the Online Offline mismatch dialog box will appear Online Offline mismatch There are differences between the online and offline configurations that prevent RSNet Worx from starting edits Upload or download the network configuration a Options OK Use online data upload a Use offline data download Cancel Help When both Options choices are available click Use offline data download When this choice is dimmed grayed out you must click Use online data upload Click OK TIP If a message box reports that the download cannot be completed because the controller is no
174. ctrical Consumption Drive 275 mA at 5 V DC supplied by the host drive or DPI External Comms Kit Network None Mechanical Dimensions Height 16 mm 0 62 inches Length 103 mm 4 00 inches Width 80 mm 3 12 inches Weight 85 g 3 oz 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P A 2 Specifications Environmental Temperature Operating 10 50 C 14 122 F Storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Atmosphere Important The adapter must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the adapter is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Regulatory Compliance Certification Specification UL UL508C cUL CAN CSA C22 2 No 14 M91 CE EN50178 and EN61800 3 CTick EN61800 3 NOTE This is a product of category C3 according to IEC 61800 3 It is not intended for operation in a domestic environment 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Parameter List Adapter Parameters Appendix B This appendix provides information about the adapter parameters For configuration tools to monitor or change parameter values of the drive adapter and other connected peripherals see Configuration Tools on page 3 1 Parameter No Name and Description 01 02
175. d 11 Hold Direction Control xX Reserved X Jog 2 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 2 Par 39 1 Jog using Jog Speed 2 Par 39 X Current Limit Stop 0 Not Current Limit Stop 1 Current Limit Stop x Coast Stop 0 Not Coast to Stop 1 Coast to Stop X Reserved X Reserved X Spd Ref Sel0 Bits X Spd Ref Sel1 4143 12 x Spd Ref Sel2 0 0 0 SpdRefA Par 27 0 0 1 Spd Ref B Par 28 0 1 0 Preset 2 Par 15 O0 1 1 Preset 3 Par 16 1 0 0 Preset 4 Par 17 1 0 1 Preset 5 Par 18 1 1 0 Preset 6 Par 19 1 1 1 Preset 7 Par 20 xX Reserved 1 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 logic bit 8 0 and logic bit 9 0 2 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P D 4 Logic Command Status Words Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Status Description Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Running 0 Not Running 1 Running Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward X Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating X Decel 0
176. d controller tags DriveStatus OutputFreq DriveLogicRslt and CommandedFreq are always used When a Datalink is enabled the following 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter I O parameters are automatically set Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter will communicate that Datalink s information with the drive Parameter 25 M S Input turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter will input that Datalink s information from the controller Parameter 26 M S Output turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter will output that Datalink s information to the controller Click OK on the Module Definition screen to save the drive and adapter configuration and close the screen The drive s New Module screen reappears Configuring the I O 4 9 8 On the New Module screen click the Connection tab E New Module General Connection Module Info Drive Requested Packet Interval RPI 20 0 2 ms 2 0 999 9 Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Use Scheduled Connection over ControiNet Status Creating 9 In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 5 0 milliseconds or greater This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter To conserve band
177. d to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView and so forth to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive user defined Program tags Figure 5 1 and a ladder logic program that will pass the Controller tag data to the Program tags Figure 5 1 ControlLogix Program Tags for Drive Add on Profile Ladder Logic Program Example Name amp Style Data Type _ Command_Clear_Faults Decimal BOOL _ Command_Forward_Reverse Decimal BOOL _ Command_Jog Decimal BOOL 4 Command_Start Decimal BOOL Command_Stop Decimal BOOL a Speed_Feedback Decimal DINT _ Speed_Reference Decimal DINT 4 Status_Active Decimal BOOL Status_At_ Speed Decimal BOOL Status_Faulted Decimal BOOL Status_Forward Decimal BOOL H Status_Ready Decimal BOOL Status_Reverse Decimal BOOL An example ladder logic program that uses the automatically created descriptive Controller tags and passes their data to the user defined Program tags is shown in Figure 5 2 and Figure 5 3 Note that the prefix for the drive Controller tags is determined by the name assigned when configuring the I O Chapter 4 Depending on the drive being used see one of the following subsections for information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling Subsection Page PowerFlex 70 700 700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control 5 9 PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5 10 PowerFlex 753 755 Drives 5 10 Powe
178. default name or type a new name and click OK The Configure driver screen appears Configure the driver for your computer and network settings Click OK 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 2 Configuring the I O ControlLogix Controller Example gt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P The Configure Drivers screen reappears with the new driver in the Configured Drivers list Configure Drivers 2x Available Driver Types Close 1784 PCC for ControlNet devices X Add New r Configured Drivers Name and Description Status 1203 USB DH Sta 0 COM9 PORT CONFLICT Running AB_DF1 5 DH Sta 0 COM3 RUNNING Running AB_ETH 1 A B Ethernet RUNNING Running AB_ETHIP 1 4 B Ethernet RUNNING Running AB_ETHIP 3 A B Ethernet RUNNING Running z AB_KT 1 DH Sta 77 STOPPED Stopped Stat AB_PCC 1 ControlNet MAC ID 20 RUNNING 16 Brian_Clending to AB_ETH 4 on 10 91 102 84 RUNNING Running Stop FCE A B Ethernet RUNNING Running FCE_Test_EthIP A B Ethernet RUNNING Running elete FCE_Test_Floor 4 B Ethernet RUNNING Running Delete George_Davenpor A B Ethernet RUNNING Running 7 Click Close to close the Configure Drivers screen 8 Keep RSLinx running and verify that your computer recognizes the drive a Select Communications gt RSWho b In the menu tree click next to the Con
179. drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable 11 Idle Fit Action Default 0 Fault Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take Values i 7 a if the adapter detects that the controller is in 2 gt op Dat program mode or faulted This setting is effective 3 E j H F only if I O that controls the drive is transmitted 4 Sa d i Ct through the adapter When the controller is put Tyoe Re TN it g back in Run mode the drive will automatically ai Required E mg receive commands over the network again eset Required No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 11 Idle Fit Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive when the controller is idle By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a faulted controller 12 CN Active Cfg Values 0 Switches 1 EEPROM Displays the source from which th
180. drive profile for this example My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive and choose Properties 2 Click the Drive tab E Module Properties My_ControlNet_Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC C 3 2 General Connection Module info Drive a Drive Not Connected Correlation with online drive has not been completed No drive data can be displayed until correlation has completed successfully Click the Connect to Drive button to begin correlation Status Faulted 3 Click Connect to Drive to begin the correlation process The Connect To Drive screen appears 4 Browse the communication path to the drive and select the drive 5 Click OK After the drive configuration data has been verified a pop up dialog box appears which synchronizes ports from the online drive to the project to be sure that correct Datalinks are assigned 6 Click OK If the Differences Found screen appears which is typical click Download This will download the project settings from the controller to the drive and its connected adapter If Upload is clicked the drive and adapter settings are uploaded to the controller Differences Found Differences were found between the project and the drive How do you want to proceed Upload I Show Details Configuring the I O 4 13 TIP On subsequent connections to the drive after initial download click Upload When the Reset Comm Module screen appears click Yes to reset the communicati
181. drive speed Reference to 22 DPI Port 5 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Installing the Adapter 2 9 2 If hard wired discrete digital inputs are not used to control the drive verify that unused digital input drive Parameters 361 Dig In1 Sel and 362 Dig In2 Sel are set to 0 Not Used 3 Verify that drive Parameter 213 Speed Ref Source is reporting that the source of the Reference to the drive is 22 DPI Port 5 This ensures that any Reference commanded from the network can be monitored by using drive Parameter 002 Commanded Speed If a problem occurs this verification step provides the diagnostic capability to determine whether the drive adapter or the network is the cause P TIP For PowerFlex 750 Series drives use drive Parameter 545 Speed Ref A Sel to set the drive speed Reference a Set the Port field to Port 0 PowerFlex 75x b Set the Parameter field to point to the port slot in which the 20 COMM C adapter 20 750 20COMM Communication Carrier Card are installed for example 876 Port 6 Reference The number 876 in the Parameter field of the example is the parameter in the drive that points to the port Commissioning the Adapter To commission the adapter you must set a unique node address on the network See Setting the Node Address on page 3 3 for details Important New settings for some adapter parameters are recog
182. driver with RSLinx software See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 4 1 and RSLinx online help for details Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 software goes into the Online mode and the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the screen should be flashing green Select File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to save the configuration as a file on your computer To be sure that the present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload and save the values Configure any Datalinks in the drive for example Datalink parameters 300 317 in PowerFlex 70 700 drives that were enabled in the controller and adapter during I O configuration Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C Each Datalink being used must be assigned to a specific parameter in the drive or connected peripheral If this is not done the controller will receive or send placeholder data instead of actual drive or peripheral parameter values Place the controller in Remote Run or Run Mode 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 24 Configuring the I O PLC 5 Controller Example 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 Use
183. e For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values see Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5 40 Use RSNetWorx for ControlNet Software to Configure the I O and Save It to the 1747 SCNR Scanner To establish an I O configuration that can be used between the controller and drive over a ControlNet network you must first create an I O image for the SLC 500 controller s 1747 SCNR scanner 1 Start RSNetWorx for ControlNet software 2 In the RSNetWorx for ControlNet window select File gt New to display the New File screen 3 Select ControlNet Configuration as the network configuration type 4 Click OK 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 32 Configuring the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 Select Network gt Online to display the Browse for Network screen Browse for Network Select a communications path to the desired network IV Autobrowse _Retresh_ Bs Linx Gateways Ethernet as ControlNet ControlNet d Ethernet Ethernet de EtherNet IP Ethernet Bs Serial OH 485 25 USB Data Highway Plus 6 Expand the communication path from your computer to the 1747 SCNR scanner The following screen shows our example navigating to devices that are on a ControlNet network Depending on the communication link you are using the navigation
184. e Message Timeout 500 The time in milliseconds that the message must be completed ControlNet Addr 2 The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Service Write Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be written to using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 54 3 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Words field to be set to 1 If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer the Size in Words must be set to 2 When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Size in Words to be set to 2 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 46 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Controller Example Write Single Request Data
185. e Parameter 276 Logic Mask in the drive are configured to receive the desired logic from the adapter See the documentation for your drive for details 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 3 4 Configuring the Adapter Setting Master Slave Hierarchy 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P 4 If you enabled one or more Datalinks configure parameters in the drive to determine the source and destination of data in the Datalinks When using Datalinks up to 8 drive Data In xx parameters 300 307 and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters 310 317 must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application See Chapter 4 for an example 5 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 7 The adapter is ready to receive I O You must now configure the adapter to receive I O from the master See Setting Master Slave Hierarchy A hierarchy determines the type of device with which the adapter exchanges data In a Master Slave hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with a master such as a bridge or scanner 1756 CNB CNBR 1747 SCNR and so forth 1 Enable the desired I O in Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg See Setting the I O Configuration on page 3 3 2 Set the bits in Parameter 25 M S Input This parameter determines the data received from the master by the drive A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disab
186. e less than 100 00 or scale above the network Reference more than 100 00 ATTENTION To guard against equipment damage and or A personal injury note that changes to adapter Parameter 27 Ref Adjust take effect immediately A drive receiving its Reference from the adapter will receive the newly scaled Reference resulting in a change of speed If the adapter is receiving a Reference set Parameter 27 Ref Adjust to the desired scaling factor Port 5 Device Default 100 00 20 COMM C Parameter 27 Ref Adjust 0 00 lt gt 200 00 The adjustment takes effect as soon as it is entered By default when I O communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected or the controller is idle in program mode or faulted the drive responds by faulting if it is using I O from the network You can configure a different response to these faults e Disrupted I O communication by using Parameter 10 Comm FIt Action e An idle controller by using Parameter 11 Idle Flt Action Parameters 10 Comm FIt Action and 11 Idle Flt Action let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if I O communication is disrupted or the controller is idle By default these parameters fault the drive You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment dama
187. e the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 Output Freq 45 0 Hz REAL 7 Output Current 0 04 Amp REAL 137 Open Loop Fdbk 710659711 DINT 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data 45 0 Hz REAL 260 Analog In0 Value 9 361 Volts REAL 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 59 SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Custom scattered write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Drive Parameter Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 148 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog In0 Hi 5 5 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Para
188. e 5 18 being used in this example PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 with Standard Control and PowerFlex 700H Drives When using any of these products which contain INT 16 bit format data types you will read from and write to a single data table address in the controller Properties Usage Help Table 5 R SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 70 Drives with Standard or Enhanced Control PowerFlex 700 Drives with Standard Control PowerFlex 700H Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Reserved for scanner status N9 1 Reserved for scanner status NQ 2 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 3 Speed Feedback N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference N10 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 N10 5 Value
189. e DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 38 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N60 dec Radix Decimal Columns 10 Radix Decimal 2 Columns 10 v PLC 5 Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 40 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters Figure 6 40 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N70 dec Radix Decimal pe Columns 10 Using Explicit Messaging 6 33 In this example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Address Read Value 1 Output Freq N70 1 90 0 Hz 3 Output Current N70 4 0 09 Amp 6 Output Voltage N70 7 229 1V AC 12 DC Bus Voltage N70 10 325 3V DC 17 Analog In2 Value N70 13 8 318 mA Figure 6 41 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive i Data File N60 dec 0 16948 7 10486 15651 137 12673 10843 21581 Oo 16948 260 14680 16661 0 0 DE Radix Decimal Ne Symbol Columns 10 vf Desc N60 Properties Usage Help The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters
190. e Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging The data structures in Figure 6 34 and Figure 6 35 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 34 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Word 0 1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW 2 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Pad Word 4 Parameter Value LSW 5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW 8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW 14 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Pad Word 64 Parameter Value LSW 65 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW Figure 6 3
191. e Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 77 or Figure 6 80 to store the request values to be written to these drive parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Address Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Data Type Drive Parameter Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 N90 1 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec REAL 143 Decel Time 2 N90 4 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec REAL 105 Preset Speed 5 N90 7 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 32 bit integer 106 Preset Speed 6 N90 10 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog In0 Hi 5 5 REAL 107 Preset Speed 7 N90 13 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 32 bit integer See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 77 or Figure 6 80 shows the parameter values Figure 6 77 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive 4 Data File N80 dec Radix Decimal i Columns 10 v Help N80 0 Symbol Desc N80 Properties Usage SLC 500 Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 78 to store the response values that were written to the requested drive parameters Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 78 Example
192. e String SHORT_STRING Group name 2 Get Number of Members in Group WORD Number of parameters in group 3 Get 1st Parameter Number in Group WORD 1 4 Get 2nd Parameter Number in Group WORD 1 n Get WORD 1 1 Value varies based on group instance 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 8 ControlNet Objects PCCC Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x67 103 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x4B No Yes Execute_PCCC 0x4C No Yes Execute _DH Instances Not supported Class Attributes Not supported Instance Attributes Not supported Message Structure for Execute_PCCC Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description Length USINT Length of requestor ID Length USINT Length of requestor ID Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Number Number Other Product Identifier of user task etc on the Other Product Identifier of user task etc on the requestor Specific requestor Specific CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for all CMDs EXT_STS USINT Extended status not used for all C
193. e adapter node Type Read Only 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P address is taken This will either be 0 Switches or 1 EEPROM in which the address from Parameter 03 CN Addr Cfg is stored The source is determined by the settings of the adapter Node Address switches Parameter No Name and Description 13 14 15 16 DPI I O Cfg Sets the I O that is transferred through the adapter DPI I O Act Displays the I O that the adapter is actively transmitting The value of this parameter will usually be equal to the value of Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg Fit Cfg Logic Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 10 Comm Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communication is disrupted e Parameter 11 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle The bit definitions will depend on the product to which the adapter is connected See Appendix D or the documentation for the drive being used Fit Cfg Ref Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 10 Comm Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communication is disrupted e Parameter 11 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle Fit Cfg A1 In Fit Cfg A2 In Fit Cfg B1 In F
194. e addresses With this conversion the M1 e 3 address will become N9 0 and the MO e 3 address will become N10 0 Figure 5 17 shows an example ladder logic program to convert memory addresses to N data table addresses Figure 5 17 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Convert Memory Addresses COP Copy File Source M1 1 3 Dest N9 0 Length 12 COP Copy File Source N10 0 Dest M0 1 3 Length 10 TIP In the ladder logic COP instructions the number following the colon in the M1 and MO addresses is the slot number in which the scanner resides For example if the 1747 SCNR scanner is in slot 3 then the M1 address becomes M1 3 3 and the MO address becomes M0 3 3 After the conversion Figure 5 18 shows the entire data file address structure for this example 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 42 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Figure 5 18 Data File Tables for Example Ladder Logic Program i File N9 dec CNET_DATA ControlNet data file NOT Racine Decimal Symbok Columns 10 x Radix Decimal Z Columns 10 v Depending on the drive Table 5 R Table 5 S Table 5 T Table 5 U Table 5 V or Table 5 W shows the I O definitions as they relate to the N9 0 and N10 0 data table addresses in Figur
195. e and a response message for all Explicit Messages whether you are reading or writing data Figure 6 1 Explicit Message Process Set up and send Explicit oO Message Request Complete Explicit Message i Retrieve Explicit Message Response Channel A ControlNet Network oy optional redundancy _ Channel B BY Bg ey Reve ee Ngee cle a See A ee Event Description o You format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message request to the scanner or bridge module download The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the network The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner The data is stored in the scanner buffer 4 The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner s buffer upload The Explicit Message is complete For information on the maximum number of Explicit Messages that can be executed at a time see the documentation for the scanner or bridge and or controller that is being used 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 4 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Examples 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P TIP To display the Message Configuration screen in RSLogix 5000 soft
196. e and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic Figure 4 2 Controller Tags Name My _PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_Ready My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_Active My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_CommandDir My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_ActualDir My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_Accelerating My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_Decelerating My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_Alarm My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_Faulted My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l DriveStatus_AtSpeed My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_LocallD0 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_LocallD1 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_LocallD2 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_SpdReflDO My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_SpdReflD1 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_SpdReflD2 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_SpdReflD3 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive OutputFreq My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive QutputCurrent My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DCBusVoltage My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Fault Code My _PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRsit_Stop My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRisit_Start My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_Jog My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_Cl
197. e ccc ee eens Using Logic Command Status 0 0 0 eee eee eee eens Using Reference Feedback 1 1 0 0 eerren ita tani Kea RE tenes Using Datalinks 3 3 0 2 ces gee Pata ce E E He weg cee ee Example Ladder Logic Program Information 0 0 00 sete eee eee ee ControlLogix Controller Example 1 0 0 0 2c eee eee PLC 5 Controller Example 0 0 cece cence eee nes SLC 500 Controller Example 0 0 0 cece eee eee eae Using Explicit Messaging About Explicit Messaging 0 0 2 eee eee en ene a ne eens Performing Explicit Messages 0 0 cece eect eee teens ControlLogix Controller Examples 0 0 cece cece eee eens PLC 5 Controller Examples 0 0 cece eee eens SLC 500 Controller Examples 0 0 0 0 cece ccc eee ene eae Troubleshooting Understanding the Status Indicators 0 0 eee eee tenes PORE Statuis Indicator jc ctw atone Aes ce es ee ole ae eee MOD Status Indicator seebi a Ui eee No a Be ih a ae AE As NET A and NET B Status Indicators 0 0 0 2 eee cee eens Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 0 0 0 eee eee eee Viewing and Clearing Events 00 cece cee nee eee eens Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installing the Adapter panenn ey Ae eda Yee eR eas T O Board Option 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 2 0 0 eee eee eee Understanding the I O Image Drive I O Option 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee Configuri
198. e field must be set to DINT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL When using a PowerFlex 700S drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 10 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version A Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Table 6 E Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Write_Message BOOL MSG Single_Write_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 8 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute_Single_
199. e parameter 82 and 55 default values speed Reference Feedback scaling is 60 Hz 130 Hz 32767 15123 Therefore 0 15123 0 60 0 Hz If parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed to 90 Hz then 90 Hz 130 Hz 32767 22685 Therefore 0 22685 0 90 0 Hz A graphic representation of this Reference Feedback scaling is shown below 130 Hz 90 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz 15123 22685 32767 Par 55 Maximum Freq Scaling Parameter 82 Parameter 55 32767 For PowerFlex 70 drives with enhanced control firmware 2 xxx or later or PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control firmware 3 xxx or later drive parameter 298 DPI Ref Select was added to simplify scaling for the speed Reference Feedback When drive parameter 298 DPI Ref Select is set to its default 0 Max Freq the speed Reference Feedback scaling is as shown above However when parameter 298 DPI Ref Select is set to 1 Max Speed the speed Reference Feedback scaling is equal to parameter 82 Max Speed Parameter 82 Scaling Using the parameter 82 default value speed Reference Feedback scaling is 0 32767 0 60 0 Hz 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 10 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P If parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed to 90 Hz then 90 Hz 32767 Speed Feedback uses the same scaling as the sp
200. e the configuration as a file on your computer 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 38 Configuring the I O Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P About I O Messaging Chapter 5 Using the I O This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to control configure and monitor a PowerFlex 7 Class drive using the configured I O Topic Page About I O Messaging 5 1 Understanding the I O Image 5 2 Using Logic Command Status 5 8 Using Reference Feedback 5 8 Using Datalinks 5 11 Example Ladder Logic Program Information 5 13 ControlLogix Controller Example 5 14 PLC 5 Controller Example 5 23 SLC 500 Controller Example 5 38 ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The A examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication On CIP based networks including ControlNet I O connections are used to transfer the data which controls the PowerFlex drive and sets its Reference T O can also be used to transfer data to and from Datalinks in PowerFlex 7 Class drives The adapter provides many options for configuring and using I O includ
201. e the drive s EEPROM If continuous writes are necessary use the Generic Set Attribute Single Service and attribute 10 see page 6 51 e Generic Get Set Attribute Service requires more setup data to be entered in message configuration screens but can be used to perform single parameter read or write explicit messages or multiple parameter read or write explicit messages Also the Generic Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage NVS or the drive s Random Access Memory RAM for Generic Set Attribute Single service only see page 6 51 Note that when selecting the data to be written to RAM the data will be lost if the drive loses power For supported classes instances and attributes see Appendix C ControlNet Objects Block transfer or CEM ControlNet Explicit Message instructions can be used to perform explicit messaging Since CEM instructions are easier to configure and perform more efficiently they are used for these examples Important RSLogix 500 software version 7 10 or later and a SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 controller Series C with firmware version 10 00 or later are required to use CEM instructions Using Explicit Messaging 6 41 SLC 500 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Read Write Parameter Service SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Read Parameter message is used to read a single parameter This r
202. e to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 6 55 Write Parameter Message Configuration Screen CEM N14 0 67 Elements Send Data Receive Data This Controller Message Control Bits 1747 SCNR Slot f1 Timeout TO Size in Words Receive Data 0 Send Data 7 Error ER Data Table Address Receive Data TE Send Data N50 0 Done DN Enabled EN Waiting for Slot WS Target Device Message Timeout x1 ms 500 Scanner Status ControINet Addr dec 2 Service Write Parameter Service Code hex Class hex F dec 15 Instance hex 8C dec 140 Attribute hex dec 7 Member hex 0 dec 0 Error Code hex 4 Scanner Code hex 0 No errors Error Eror Description Response error 05h Path destination unknown The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description 1747 SCNR Slot 1 The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Size in Words Send Data 1 3 Number of words to be sent written Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address Send Data N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source fil
203. e units 20 Get International DPI Online Read Full Struct of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online maximum value CONTAINER Online default value WORD Next WORD Previous WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BYTE 3 Link BYTE Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor UDINT Extended Descriptor see page C 34 22 Get International DPI Offline Read Full Struct of BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiplier parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad word always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BOOL 32 Extended DPI descriptor STRINGN International DPI parameter name STRINGN International DPI offline parameter units 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This va
204. ead message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter read follow the SLC 500 Generic Attribute Service single read example on page 6 48 Figure 6 50 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter B3 0 CEM J F ControlNet Explicit Message CEN o Control Block N13 0 CDN Control Block Length 67 CER Setup Screen lt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 42 Using Explicit Messaging General Tab 1747 SCNR Slot Size in Words Receive Data Data Table Address Receive Data Message Timeout ControlNet Addr Service 1 Instance 2 SLC 500 Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 6 51 Read Parameter Message Configuration Screen lt 4 CEM N13 0 67 Elements end Data Receive Data This Controller 1747 SCNR Slot f1 Timeout TO Size in Words Receive Data 2 Send Data o Error ER Data Table Address Receive Data N40 0 Send Data NA Done DN Target Device Message Timeout x1 ms ControlNet Addr dec Service Read Parameter Service Code hex E_ Message Control Bits Enabled EN Waiting for Slot WS 500 Scanner Status 2
205. earFault My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRsit_Forward My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRsit_Reverse My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_LocalContl My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_MOPInc My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_Accell My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_Accel2 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRsk_Decell My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_Decel2 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_SpdReflDO My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_SpdReflD1 amp Value fess 2 0000 Force Mask Style Binary Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Binary Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Data Type AB PowerFlex70E INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT DINT INT INT AB PowerFlex70E INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Configuring the I O 4 11 Save the I O Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive adapter to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer In the RSLogix 5000 window select Commun
206. ed EN Waiting for Slot WS Message Timeout x1 ms 500 Scanner Status ControlNet Addr dec 2 Scanner Code hex 0 Service Custom Service Code hex No errors Class hex dec 147 Instance hex dec 0 Error dec 0 g o Attribute hex 0 Member hex 0 dec fo Error Code hex 0 Eror Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters General Tab 1747 SCNR Slot Size in Words Receive Data Size in Words Send Data Data Table Address Receive Data Data Table Address Send Data Message Timeout ControlNet Addr Service Service Code Class Instance Attribute Example Value 1 15 15 2 N90 0 N80 0 500 2 Custom 4C Hex 93 or 9F Hex 0 Dec 0 Dec Description The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Number of words to be received Each word size is a 16 bit integer Number of words to be sent written Each word size is a 16 bit integer An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file The time in m
207. ed 4 545 Spd Ref A Sel Port 0 Port 6 Reference Assigns 20 COMM C Q to be used for the Reference 895 Data In A1 Port 0 Accel Time 1 Points to Par 535 in the drive 896 Data In A2 Port 0 Testpoint Sel 1 Points to Par 970 in the drive 897 Data In B1 Port 5 Anlg Outt Hi Points to Par 90 in Port 5 I O module 905 Data Out A1 Port 0 DC Bus Volts Points to Par 11 in the drive 906 Data Out A2 Port 0 Open Loop Fdbk Points to Par 137 in the drive 907 Data Out B1 Port 5 Anlg Out0 Data Points to Par 77 in Port 5 I O module 03 CN Addr Cfg 2 Node address for the adapter 13 DPI I O Cfg xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 25 M S Input xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 26 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network 1 In this example the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter 20 750 20COMM Communication Carrier Card is installed in Port 6 and a 24V I O module is installed in Port 5 Also Data In B2 D2 Parameters 898 902 and Data Out B2 D2 Parameters 908 912 are enabled but not used gt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out param
208. ed for the example ladder logic program in this section PowerFlex 750 Series Drive 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q Adapter Parameter Value Description 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM C Q to be used for the Reference 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 545 Spd Ref A Sel Port 0 Port 6 Reference Assigns 20 COMM C Q to be used for the Reference 895 Data In A1 Port 0 Accel Time 1 Points to Par 535 in the drive 896 Data I
209. ed object specific service Name Data Type Description Parameter Number UDINT Parameter to read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value to read or write zero when reading 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 22 ControlNet Objects DPI Fault Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x97 151 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for faults Adapters use this object for events Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of faults or events supported in the queue The maximum number of faults events can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Second Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Most Recent Adapter Event 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 0x5C00 0x5FFF 1 23552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 124576 25599 DPI
210. ed out 30 PCCC IO Close The device sending PCCC Control messages to the adapter has set the PCCC Control Timeout to zero 31 PCCC IO Open me na has begun receiving PCCC control messages the PCCC Control Timeout was previously set to a non zero value 32 PCCC IO Time Fit The adapter has not received a PCCC Control message for longer than the PCCC Control Timeout 33 Watchdog T O Fit The software detects a failure 34 EEPROM Init Startup sequence detected a blank EEPROM map revision 35 DPI Fault Clear The drive issued this because a fault was cleared 36 Normal Startup The adapter successfully started up 37 Manual Reset The adapter was reset by changing its Reset Module parameter 38 OPT Open The adapter began exchanging I O data with the I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 7 8 Troubleshooting Table 7 B Adapter Events Continued Code Event Description 39 OPT Close The adapter forced a fault condition on the I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit 40 OPT Timeout Communication between the adapter and I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit was disrupted 41 CN Link Up The adapter successfully joined the ControlNet network 42 CN Link Down The adapter lost its connection to the ControlNet network 43 Dup CN Addr The adapter detected a duplicate ControlNet node address 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 2
211. ed to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 46 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Table 5 V SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Reserved for scanner status N9 1 Reserved for scanner status NQ 2 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 3 Not Used N9 4 Speed Feedback LSW N9 5 Speed Feedback MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data Out A1 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Pa
212. ed_Read_Response 13 Dest Length 2 Analog_in0_Value 2 In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 Output Freq 45 0 Hz REAL 7 Output Current 0 03 Amp REAL 137 Open Loop Fdbk 1706253458 DINT 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data 45 0 Hz REAL 260 Analog In0 Value 9 366 Volts REAL 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 18 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Write Multiple Parameters ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version A Scattered Write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Drive Parameter Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 148 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog In0 Hi 5 5 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for pa
213. eed Reference TIP For PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control firmware 3 xxx or later parameter 299 DPI Fdbk Select enables you to select the feedback data coming from the drive over DPI The default is Speed Fdbk in Hz or RPM determined by parameter 079 Speed Units The data selection for parameter 299 is also displayed on the 1st line of the HIM and on DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software screens in the drive status area of the screen PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control The Reference Feedback value is 32767 Base Motor Speed The base speed is set using drive parameter 4 Motor RPM To set a speed Reference Feedback above base speed a value greater than 32767 must be entered For 16 bit processors such as PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers the data requires manipulation to set a speed Reference above 32767 or below 32767 Please see the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 in the Chapter 1 Communications section Then go to the PLC 5 or SLC System subsection and see the Reference Feedback Programming sub subsection PowerFlex 753 755 Drives The Reference Feedback value is Hz x 1000 or RPM x 1000 Drive parameter 300 Speed Units determines whether the scaling is Hz or RPM The default scaling is Hz where 0 60 000 equates to 0 60 000 Hz When parameter 300 is set to RPM then 0 1 765 000 equates to 0 1765 000 RP
214. el Rate 2 Command Par 143 11 Hold Decel Rate Reference Select 000 No Command 001 Ref A Select Par 90 010 Ref B Select Par 93 011 Preset 3 Par 103 100 Preset 4 Par 104 101 Preset 5 Par 105 110 Preset 6 Par 106 111 Preset 7 Par 107 MOP Decrement 0 Not Decrement 1 Decrement A 0 Not Stop condition logic 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive The Start command acts as a momentary Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to 0 will not stop the drive This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 7 8 or 9 3 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 option 15 16 or 17 Note that Reference Select is Exclusive Ownership see drive User Manual for more information 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P D 2 Logic Bits Logic Command Status Words Logic Status Word 15 114 113 Status Ready Description 0 Not Ready Par 214 1 Ready Active 0 Not Active Running 1 Active Command Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Acceleratin
215. ence An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference If the Parameter parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable 1 The referenced parameter must always be writable including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the
216. er assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference N10 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control Using the I O 5 27 When using these drives which contain DINT 32 bit format data types you will read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller Table 5 K PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Speed Feedback N9 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 LSW N9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 MSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data O
217. erFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 or 5404 Hex 2 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 3 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Elements field to be set to 2 If the parameter being read is a 16 bit integer the Size in Elements must be set to 1 When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Output Current is a REAL floating point parameter You must still write this data to an integer file with Size in Elements set to 2 The following page shows ladder logic to convert the data into a floating point 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 25 PLC 5 Controller Example Single Read Response Data In this specific N40 0 message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 28 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 6 28 Example Single Read Response Data File 2 File N40 dec Radix Decimal BS Columns 10 v Properties Usage Help Figure 6 29 shows example ladder logic to correctly forma
218. erFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging In this example we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit integer regardless of its actual data type The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6 29 Maximum length is 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 32 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P PLC 5 Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 38 or Figure 6 39 to store the request values to be read from these drive parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog Ini Value e Parameter 260 Analog In0 Value Se
219. erFlex 753 755 F8 1 Table 5 Q Program and PLC 5 Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Command Reference Ladder Logic Program Description Table Address Description Table Address Command Stop B3 20 0 Drive Stop N10 0 0 Command Start B3 20 1 Drive Start N10 0 1 Command Jog B3 20 2 Drive Jog N10 0 2 Command Clear Faults B3 20 3 Drive Clear Faults N10 0 3 Command Forward Reverse XIO B3 20 4 Drive Forward N10 0 4 Command Forward Reverse XIC B3 20 4 Drive Reverse N10 0 5 Speed Reference PowerFlex 70 N30 1 Speed Reference PowerFlex 70 N10 1 PowerFlex 753 755 F8 3 PowerFlex 753 755 N10 2 An example ladder logic program that uses these descriptive controller data table addresses and passes their data to the descriptive program data table addresses is shown in Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 and Figure 5 16 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using the I O 5 33 Figure 5 13 PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Status _ Drive Ready _ Status Ready N9 0 B3 1 JE C gt 0 0 _ Drive Active Status Active N9 0 B3 1 JE Co 1 1 Actual Direction _ Status Forward N9 0 B3 1 JE Q PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex _ Actual Direction _ Status Reverse 750 Series N9 0 B3 1 Drives t C gt 3 4 _ Drive Faulted _ Status Faulted N9 0 B3 1 JE 2 7 7 _ Drive At Speed _ Status At Speed N9 0 B3 1 J C gt 8 8 20
220. erational but is not transferring e Place the scanner in RUN mode I O data to a controller e Program the controller to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter e Configure the adapter for the program in the controller e Normal behavior if no DPI I O is enabled Steady Green The adapter is operational and transferring I O No action required data to a controller 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Troubleshooting 7 3 These red green bicolor LEDs indicate the status for the ControlNet Channel A and Channel B network connections as shown in the tables below Depending on the state of these LEDs they should be interpreted powered Corrective Actions NET A and NET B Status Indicators together or independently Indicators Interpreted Together Status Cause Both LEDs Off A reset occurred or the adapter is not Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit and network Both LEDs Steady A link interface failed e Check media for broken cables loose connectors missing Red terminators and so forth e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit or reset the adapter If the problem persists contact Rockwell Technical Support LEDs Alternately The adapter is in self test mode No action required The adapter will exit this mode when the self test is Flashing Red Green completed LEDs Alternately There is a
221. eripheral at DPI port 4 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 The following N Files are supported on ly when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive N213 0 N213 2 N214 0 N215 0 N215 2 N216 0 N217 0 N217 2 N218 0 N219 0 N219 2 N220 0 N221 0 N221 2 N222 0 N223 0 N223 2 N224 0 N225 0 N225 2 N226 0 N227 0 N227 2 N228 0 d 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at
222. ervice Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Required for scattered messages Required for scattered messages 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable In this example we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit integer regardless of its actual data type The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6 53 Maximum length is 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F 3 See Table 6 4 on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 56 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P SLC 500 Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6
223. escription 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OxFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OxFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OxFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OxFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OxFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OxFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance OxFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance 0xFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance 0xFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance OxFFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OxFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OxFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 FP Max Decimals Bit 0 These four bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum number of 17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 decimal places to be displayed for small values A value of 0 indicates to not limit the 18 FP Max Decimals Bit 2 number of decimal places used 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter 0 Not an Extended Parameter Reference Reference 1 Extended Parameter Reference An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot num
224. et BYTE 3 Link source of the value 0 no link BYTE Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 33 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value in NVS 9 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory Valid only for DPI drives 11 Get Set DPI Link BYTE 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance WORD ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 33 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER __ Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name 16 Get Parameter Processing Error BYTE 0 No error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 32 ControlNet Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 18 Get International DPI Offline Parameter Text Struct of STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 19 Get International DPI Online Parameter Text Struct of STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International onlin
225. eter 620 Data Out B1 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 Data Out B2 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 Data Out B2 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 Data Out C1 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 Data Out C1 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 Data Out C2 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 Data Out C2 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 Data Out D1 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 Data Out D1 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 Data Out D2 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference N10 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 Data In A1 LSW N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 Data In A1 MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 Data In A2 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 Data In A2 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 Data In B1 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 Data In B1 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 Data In B2 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 Data In B2 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 Data In C1 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 Data In C1 MSW N10 12 Value of p
226. eter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DP Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F to determine the instance number For example to write to parameter 51 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 51 21555 or 5433 Hex In this example Accel Time 1 is parameter 140 or 8C Hex Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the A setting 3 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging 4 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Elements field to be set to 1 If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer the Size in Elements must be set to 2 When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Accel Time 1 is a REAL floating point parameter You must still write
227. eters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Using the I O 5 41 TIP When using a drive that has 16 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 and PowerFlex 700H drives to transfer a 32 bit parameter two contiguous drive Datalink parameters for example Data Out A1 A2 B1 B2 and so forth are required To determine if a parameter is a 32 bit parameter see the Parameter section in the drive documentation and look for a 7 symbol in the No column All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32 bit parameters For example parameter 3 Output Current in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32 bit parameter When using a drive that has 32 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 700 VC PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series drives only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter Understanding SLC 500 Controller Data Table Addresses Because the SLC 500 controller is a 16 bit platform and is used with the 32 bit 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter the data will be transposed from the least significant word LSW to the most significant word MSW in the controller When the I O was configured Chapter 4 two available default memory addresses M1 e 3 for input data and MO e 3 for output data were used However because memory addresses cannot be used to display real data COP instructions will be used in this example to convert these addresses to N data tabl
228. evel gt Messages Online Not Browsing If the icon for the drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC on the network appears as Unrecognized Device you must download the EDS file for that PowerFlex drive from the Rockwell Automation website a Goto the website http www rockwellautomation com resources eds b On the website search screen in the Network entry field enter the type of network for this example ControlNet which enables the use of the other search fields c In the Keyword entry field enter the type of PowerFlex drive for this example PowerFlex 70EC noting that this field is space sensitive d Click Search Due to the large number of EDS files this search may take seconds or up to several minutes e On the search results screen in the Details amp Download Column click the Download hyperlink for the EDS file f Click Save on the File Download screen to save the EDS file to an appropriate location on your computer g Launch the EDS Hardware Installation Tool by clicking the Microsoft Windows Start button and selecting Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSLinx Tools gt EDS Hardware Installation Tool Follow the screen prompts to add the EDS file for use with your project h Reboot the computer and repeat steps 1 through 7 at the beginning of this subsection The Unrecognized Device icon in the RSNetWorx for ControlNet graph view window in step 7 should have been rep
229. f parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 MSW Using the I O Table 5 M PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5 29 Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Not Used N9 2 Speed Feedback LSW N9 3 Speed Feedback MSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 66
230. g Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 211 and 212 1 Alarm Fault 0 No Fault Par 243 1 Fault At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference Local Control 000 Port 0 TB 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port 3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Port 6 111 No Local 1 See Owners in drive User Manual for further information 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Reference 0000 Ref A Auto Par 90 0001 Ref B Auto Par 93 0010 Preset 2 Auto 0011 Preset 3 Auto 0100 Preset 4 Auto 0101 Preset 5 Auto 0110 Preset 6 Auto 0111 Preset 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 1101 DPI 5 Manual 1110 DPI 6 Manual 1111 Jog Ref PowerFlex 700S Phase II Control and 700L with Logic Command Word Logic Command Status Words D 3 700S Control Drives Logic Bits 15 14 113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 j2 1 Command Description Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop 1 Normal Stop x Start 9 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 1 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 1 Par 29 1 Jog using Jog Speed 1 Par 29 x Clear Fault 0 Not Clear Fault 1 Clear Fault Unipolar Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Comman
231. ge When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or faulted controller A ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 3 6 Configuring the Adapter 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Changing the Fault Action Set the values of Parameters 10 Comm Flt Action and 11 Idle Flt Action to an action that meets your application requirements Value Action Description 0 Fault The drive is faulted and stopped Default 1 Stop The drive is stopped but not faulted 2 Zero Data The drive is sent 0 values for data This does not command a stop 3 Hold Last The drive continues in its present state 4 Send Fit Cfg The drive is sent the data that you set in the fault configuration parameters Parameters 15 FIt Cfg Logic through 24 FIt Cfg D2 In Port 5 Device Port 5 Device 20 COMM C 20 COMM C Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Comm Fit Action Idle Fit Action Fault Fault Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required If communication is disrupted and then is re established the drive will automatically receive commands over the network again Setting the Fault Configuration Parameters When setting Parameter 10 Comm FIt Action or 11
232. ge for Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and These products include the following e PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase II control e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control 32 bit Datalinks e PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 755 drives Word Output I O 0 Logic Command 1 Not Used 2 Reference LSW 3 Reference MSW 4 Datalink In A1 LSW 5 Datalink In A1 MSW 6 Datalink In A2 LSW 7 Datalink In A2 MSW 8 Datalink In B1 LSW 9 Datalink In B1 MSW 10 Datalink In B2 LSW 11 Datalink In B2 MSW 12 Datalink In C1 LSW 13 Datalink In C1 MSW 14 Datalink In C2 LSW 15 Datalink In C2 MSW 16 Datalink In D1 LSW 17 Datalink In D1 MSW 18 Datalink In D2 LSW 19 Datalink In D2 MSW SLC 500 Controller Image The I O image for the SLC 500 controller changes depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and Datalinks and the number of Datalinks used Table 5 G Table 5 H and Table 5 1 show the I O image when using Word Input I O 0 Logic Status 1 Not Used 2 Feedback LSW 3 Feedback MSW 4 Datalink Out A1 LSW 5 Datalink Out A1 MSW 6 Datalink Out A2 LSW 7 Datalink Out A2 MSW 8 Datalink Out B1 LSW 9 Datalink Out B1 MSW 10 Datalink Out B2 LSW 11 Datalink Out B2 MSW 12 Datalink Out C1 LSW 13 Datalink Out C1 MSW 14 Datalink Out C2 LSW 15 Datalin
233. he Logic Command Reference and or Datalinks 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P G 4 Glossary 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P HIM Human Interface Module A device that can be used to configure and control a drive PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs catalog number 20 HIM xx can be used to configure PowerFlex 7 Class drives and their connected peripherals Hold Last When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond by holding last Hold last results in the drive receiving the last data received via the network connection before the disruption If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will continue to run at the same Reference Host Parameters only PowerFlex 750 Series drives Host parameters are used to configure peripherals connected to a PowerFlex 750 Series drive When using a PowerFlex 7 Class HIM catalog number 20 HIM A3 A5 C3S C5S Host parameters do not appear When using a PowerFlex 750 Series HIM catalog number 20 HIM A6 C6S Host parameters appear in the HOST PARAM folder You can also view Host parameters with any of the following drive configuration tools e Connected Components Workbench software click the tab for the option module at the bottom of the window click the Parameters icon in the tool bar and open the Host parameters folder e
234. his identical information into the Module Definition screen This eliminates the need to manually enter the information each time a new drive with a matching profile is added to the network Electronic Keying Compatible Module The Compatible Module setting for Electronic Keying ensures that the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore ensure that you have set the correct revision in this screen See the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings If keying is not required select Disable Keying Drives do not require keying and so Disable Keying is recommended 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 8 Configuring the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Box Setting Drive The voltage and current rating of the drive If the drive rating is not listed the Rating drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct drive rating use the Create Database Web Update or Match Drive button described above Connection Parameters via Datalinks When selecting Parameters via Datalinks default the controller tags for the Datalinks use the drive parameter names to which they are assigned When selecting Datalinks the controller tags for the Datalinks have non descriptive UserDefinedDa
235. ications gt Download The Download dialog box appears Download Download offline project v20_Example_using_20COMMC to the controller Connected Controller Name v20_Example_using_20COMMC Type 1756 L63 B ControlLogix5563 Controller Path AB_ETHIP 1 10 91 24 134 Backplane 0 Serial Number 0082286C Security No Protection The controller is in Remote Run mode The mode will be changed to Remote Program prior to download DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller Verily these devices drives network devices 3rd party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation TIP Ifa message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online select Communications gt Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the ControlNet driver with RSLinx software See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 4 1 and RSLinx online help for details Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 software goes
236. if you read Select File gt Open you should click the File menu and then click the Open command e The firmware revision number FRN is displayed as FRN X xxx where X is the major revision number and xxx is the minor revision number e The screen images in this manual resulted from using the following software RSLinx Classic software version 2 59 RSNetWorx for ControlNet software version 11 00 RSLogix 5 software version 7 20 RSLogix 500 software version 7 20 RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 Different versions of the software may have screens that vary in appearance and differences in procedures 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P P 2 About This Manual Rockwell Automation Support Additional Resources Resource Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide with over 75 sales and support offices over 500 authorized distributors and over 250 authorized systems integrators located through the United States alone In addition Rockwell Automation representatives are in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Rockwell Automation Inc representative for Sales and order support Product technical training Warranty support Support service agreements Technical Product Assistance For technical assistance please review the information in Chapter 7 Troubleshooting first If you still
237. iguration Size Z Words Status Address M1 e 600 00 Auto Address Preferences cot toy a In this screen leave the Connection Name box at the default value shown b For the Requested Packet Interval box choose a value that is suitable for your application but is at least 5 ms c For the Input Size and Output Size boxes use the pull down menu to choose the number of words that are required for your I O The size will depend on the I O that you enabled in the adapter using Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg For this example an Input Size of 12 and an Output Size of 10 are selected Depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and the number of Datalinks used in your I O configuration Table 4 G Table 4 H or Table 4 1 defines the number of 16 bit words that you need to enter for the Input Size and Output Size boxes Table 4 G Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e SMC 50 smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700H drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 16 bit User Configured Settings pata 16 bit Sizein Words Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 A B C D input Output PP VO Cfg M S Input M S Output Vv Vv 4 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Vv Vv Vv 6 4 0 0011 0 0011
238. ile RSLogix 5000 software versions 13 00 15 00 e Generic Profile RSLogix 5000 software all versions These are described in separate sections below If your version of RSLogix 5000 software supports drive Add on Profiles we recommend that you use this method Using RSLogix 5000 Drive Add on Profiles Version 16 00 or Later When compared to using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile versions 13 00 15 00 or Generic Profile all versions the RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profiles provide the following advantages e Profiles for specific drives that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback and Datalinks Additionally Datalinks automatically take the name of the drive parameter to which they are assigned These profiles virtually eliminate I O mismatch errors and substantially reduce drive configuration time e New Drive tab eliminates the need for a separate drive software configuration tool e Drive configuration settings are saved as part of the RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later project file ACD and also downloaded to the controller e Drive Add on Profiles can be updated anytime When a new drive is used or to benefit from new updates for Add on Profiles you will need the newest Add on Profile update Go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate to download the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile To determine your drive Add on Profile
239. illiseconds that the message must be completed The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Required for scattered messages Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Required for scattered messages Required for scattered messages 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable In this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer regardless of its actual data type The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6 53 Maximum length is 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DP Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F 8 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 61 SLC 500 Controller Exampl
240. indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Instance Attributes ControlNet Objects C 17 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiple parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad byte always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 19 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Next parameter WORD Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz UINT Multiplier 2 UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset BYTE 3 Link source of the value 0 no link BYTE Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL 32 Des
241. ing the following e Configuring the size of I O by enabling or disabling the Logic Command Reference and Datalinks e Setting a Master Slave hierarchy Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter and Chapter 4 Configuring the I O discuss how to configure the adapter and controller on the network for these options The defines the different options This chapter discusses how to use I O after you have configured the adapter and controller 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 2 Using the I O Understanding the I O Image The terms input and output are defined from the controller s point of 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P view Therefore output I O is data that is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input I O is status data that is produced by the adapter and consumed as input by the controller The I O image will vary based on the following e Size either 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback words and Datalink words used by the drive To determine the size of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks view adapter Parameters 07 Ref Fdbk Size and 08 Datalink Size For information to access parameters see Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters on page 3 2 e Configuration of I O Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg If all I O is not enabled the image is truncated The image always uses consecutive
242. ing 6 9 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later Figure 6 7 Parameter Write Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Single_Write_Message Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Configuration Communication Tag Message Type cir Generic Service Type Service Code De Instance 140 Parameter Write Source Length Hex Class Attribute Source Element v Accel_Time_1 Bytes New Tag Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Enable Waiting Start Extended Eror Code Done Done Length 0 I Timed Out ok Cancel roy Heb The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Configuration Tab Message Type Service Type Service Code Class Instance Attribute Source Element 2 Source Length Example Value CIP Generic Parameter Write 10 Hex f Hex 140 Dec 1 Hex Accel_Time_1 9 4 Description Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter This service is used to write a parame
243. ink In D2 9 Datalink Out D2 Table 5 E PLC 5 Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control e PowerFlex Digital DC drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Reference 1 Feedback 2 Datalink In A1 LSW 2 Datalink Out A1 LSW 3 Datalink In A1 MSW 3 Datalink Out A1 MSW 4 Datalink In A2 LSW 4 Datalink Out A2 LSW 5 Datalink In A2 MSW 5 Datalink Out A2 MSW 6 Datalink In B1 LSW 6 Datalink Out B1 LSW 7 Datalink In B1 MSW 7 Datalink Out B1 MSW 8 Datalink In B2 LSW 8 Datalink Out B2 LSW 9 Datalink In B2 MSW 9 Datalink Out B2 MSW 10 Datalink In C1 LSW 10 Datalink Out C1 LSW 11 Datalink In C1 MSW 11 Datalink Out C1 MSW 12 Datalink In C2 LSW 12 Datalink Out C2 LSW 13 Datalink In C2 MSW 13 Datalink Out C2 MSW 14 Datalink In D1 LSW 14 Datalink Out D1 LSW 15 Datalink In D1 MSW 15 Datalink Out D1 MSW 16 Datalink In D2 LSW 16 Datalink Out D2 LSW 17 Datalink In D2 MSW 17 Datalink Out D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 6 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Table 5 F PLC 5 Controller I O Ima
244. int Dest Scattered_Write_Request 13 Length 2 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 22 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 6 24 Example Scattered Write Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Name a Value Data Type Description Scattered_Write_Request INT 15 Scattered Write_Request 0 536 INT Parameter Number decimal i Scattered_Write_Request 1 26214 INT Parameter Value LSW H Scattered_write_Reguest 2 16689 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Write_Request 3 538 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_ Request 4 _ 26214 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Write_Request 5 16817 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Write_Request 6 725 INT Parameter Number decimal i Scattered Write Request 7 33 INT Parameter Value LSW Es Scattered_Write_Request 8 o INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Write_Request 3 21555 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_equest 1 0 O INT Parameter Value LSW _ Scattered Write_Request 11 16560 INT Parameter Value MSW 3 Scattered_write_Request 12 780 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write_Request 13 10019 INT Parameter Value LSW H Scattered Write_Request 14 2 INT Parameter Value MSW I The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag Scattered_Write_Response Figure 6 25 Va
245. ion of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 1111 15 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit 4 Bit 16 is the least significant bit 17 Extended Data Type Bit 5 a fecal P used as an array of Boolean 18 Extended Data Type Bit 6 010 Reserved y 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 Not Used Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Not a Link Source 0 May be the source end of a link 1 May not be the source end of a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI Limits Object Intelligent offline tools make use of the Limits Object to select limits and units 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download _ Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User
246. it Cfg B2 In Fit Cfg C1 In Fit Cfg C2 In Fit Cfg D1 In Fit Cfg D2 In Sets the data that is sent to the Datalink in the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 10 Comm Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communication is disrupted e Parameter 11 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle Adapter Parameters B 3 Details Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O Disabled 1 1 0 Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required Yes ink C ink B inkA Bit Definition Used Used Used a a al Default Bit s x No x No a x No w o Da oj Da o Da Bit Values 0 I O Disabled 1 I O Enabled Type Read Only ink C ink B Bit Definition Used Used Used al Default Bit nix No x No a x No w o Dat Datal Cmd Ref Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Minimum 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum 1111111111111111 Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0 Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Type Read Write Reset Required No Important If the drive uses a 16 bit Reference the most significant word of this value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum 4294967295 Type Read Write Reset Required N
247. it set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 66 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Word 0 1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW 2 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Pad Word 4 Parameter Value LSW 5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW 8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW 14 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Pad Word 64 Parameter Value LSW 65 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW Figure 6 67 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Numbe
248. ity Authority Allen Bradley 1756 L63 Control ogixS563 Controller 20 v Redundancy Enabled v20_Example_using_20COMMC Example showing how to control a PowerFlex 70 EC drive with a 20 COMM C ControlNet adapter using RSLogix5000 V20 software C ARSLogix 5000 Projects No Protection a Choose the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application b Click OK The RSLogix 5000 window reappears with the treeview in the left pane 3 In the treeview right click the I O Configuration folder and choose New Module The Select Module screen appears 4 In the list select the ControlNet bridge used by your controller Select Module Type Catalog Module Discovery Faverites Analog Controller Digital 50008 Catalog Number 1756 CFM 1756 0N2 1756 CN2R 1756 CNBR 1756 DHRIO 1756 DMA30 1756 0MA31 1756 DMA50 1756 DMB30 1756 DMD30 1756 DMF30 1756 0N8 1756 EN2F 1756 EN2T 1756EN2TR ITSRENIR lt Communication Hide Fers 2 Module Type Category Fiters Module Type Vendor Fiters a Allen Bradey Molex Incorporated Hardy Instruments Inc Online Development Inc Automation Value Description Vendor Category Configurable Flow Meter Allen Bradiey Speciaty 1756 ControlNet Bridge Allen Bradiey Communication 1756 CortrolNet Bridge Allen Bradley 1756 ControlNet Bridge 1756 ControlNet Bridge Redundant Media
249. ive 0 Data 4 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data 5 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data 6 o Decimal INT _ My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data 7 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Dri Data 8 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data 9 0 Decimal INT Save the I O Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive adapter to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration as a file on your computer TIP When using RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later you can add the I O configuration of a Generic Profile while the controller is online and in the Run mode 1 Configuring the I O 4 23 In the RSLogix 5000 window select Communications gt Download The Download dialog box appears Download Download offline project v15_Example_using_20COMMC to the controller Connected Controller Name lt no name gt Type 1756 L63 4 ControlLogix5563 Controller Path EtherNet 1P 10 91 100 83 Backplane 0 Serial Number 00244888 Security No Protection Cancel Help TIP If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online select Communications gt Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the ControlNet
250. ive and power products and the associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up configuration and subsequent maintenance of the product using an adapter Failure to comply may result in injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The adapter contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 5 2 ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the adapter is transmitting control I O to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting an adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 10 Comm FIt Action and 11 Idle Flt Action let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if communication is disrupted or the controller is idle By default these parameters fault the drive You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or a controller in id
251. k Out C2 MSW 16 Datalink Out D1 LSW 17 Datalink Out D1 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 LSW 19 Datalink Out D2 MSW various PowerFlex drives and all Datalinks enabled Using the I O 5 7 Table 5 G SLC 500 Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control SMC Flex smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e SMC 50 smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700H drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Reference 1 Pad Word 2 Datalink In A1 2 Logic Status 3 Datalink In A2 3 Feedback 4 Datalink In B1 4 Datalink Out A1 5 Datalink In B2 5 Datalink Out A2 6 Datalink In C1 6 Datalink Out B1 7 Datalink In C2 7 Datalink Out B2 8 Datalink In D1 8 Datalink Out C1 9 Datalink In D2 9 Datalink Out C2 10 Datalink Out D1 11 Datalink Out D2 Table 5 H SLC 500 Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control e PowerFlex Digital DC drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Reference 1 Pad Word 2
252. k Usage lt 4 gt M Connection Configuration Connection Status 7 4 Current Current Current Curent Diagnostic File N Configuration File N Data Input File H Data Output File N Status File N Configuration File Size 1000 Data Input File Size 1000 Data Output File Size 1000 For Help press F1 Onine Edit PLC 5 40C Address 01 Remote Program 10 Right click the PowerFlex 70 EC drive row in the screen and choose Insert Connection to display the Connection Properties screen Connection Properties Connection Electronic Keying Details Target Information To Address 02 Device Name PowerFlex 70 EC To Slot Connection Hane Exclusive Owner A Communication Parameters Name Value Requested Packet Interval ms 20 Addressing Parameters Input Size 2 w Words Input Address N30 Output Size 2 v Words Output Address N10 0 Configuration Size Words Configuration Address n Status Address N11 0 Auto Address Preferences a In this screen leave the Connection Name box at the default value shown b For the Requested Packet Interval box choose a value that is suitable for your application but is at least 5 ms c For the Input Size and Output Size boxes use the pull down menu to choose the number of words that are required for your I O The size will depend on the I O that you enabled in the adapter using Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg For this examp
253. laced by a drive icon for this example the icon for a PowerFlex 70 EC drive 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 16 Configuring the I O 8 gt 9 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Select Network gt Enable Edits or check the Edits Enabled box in the RSNetWorx for ControlNet project window If the bridge has a different I O configuration than the configuration now being saved the Online Offline mismatch dialog box will appear Online Offline mismatch There are differences between the online and offline configurations that prevent RSNet Worx from starting edits Upload or download the network configuration Options 0K C Use online data upload Lok Use offline data download a When both Options choices are available click Use offline data download When this choice is dimmed grayed out you must click Use online data upload b Click OK TIP If a message box reports that the download cannot be completed because the controller is not in Program mode click Change Mode to place the controller in Remote Program mode and continue the download Select File gt Save to save the I O configuration file to the computer If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to save the configuration as a file on you
254. le an Input Size of 10 and an Output Size of 10 are selected Depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and the number of Datalinks used in your I O configuration Table 4 D Table 4 E or Table 4 F defines the number of 16 bit words that you need to enter for the Input Size and Output Size boxes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Table 4 D Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e PowerFlex 700H drives Configuring the I O 4 29 e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e SMC 50 smart motor controllers Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 16 bit User Configured Settings Ss 16 bit alele io Size in Words Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output Y Y 2 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Y Y Y 4 4 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 Y Y Viv 6 6 0 0111 0 0111 0 0111 Vv Vv V iV iv 8 8 0 1111 01111 01111 Vv Vv V v iv v 710 10 11111 11111 11111 Table 4 E Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control e PowerFlex Digital DC drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 con
255. le state ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists When a system is configured for the first time there may be unintended or incorrect machine motion Disconnect the motor from the machine or process during initial system testing ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 1 6 Getting Started Quick Start This section is provided to help experienced users quickly start using the adapter If you are unsure how to complete a step refer to the referenced chapter Step Action See 1 Review the safety precautions for the adapter Throughout this manual 2 Verify that the PowerFlex drive is properly installed Drive User Manual 3 Install the adapter PowerFlex 7 Class DPI a Verify that the PowerFlex drive is not powered Network Communication oe Adapter Installation b Connect the adapter to the drive with the Internal Interface Instructions publication cable 20COMM INO004 and c Use the captive screws to secure and ground the adapter to Chapter 2 the drive Installing the Adapter d Connect the adapter to the netwo
256. les the I O Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM C 0 Logic Command Reference Default Parameter 25 1 Datalink A Input M S Input xxxXxxxxxxxx0 0 0 Of 2 Datalink B Input Cmd Ref b00 3 Datalink C Input 4 Datalink D Input 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 3 Set the bits in Parameter 26 M S Output This parameter determines the data transmitted from the drive to the bridge or scanner A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM C 0 Status Feedback Default oe 26 1 Datalink A Output XXXXXXXXXXX0 00 Of 2 Datalink B Output Status Fdbk b00 3 Datalink C Output 4 Datalink D Output 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 4 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 7 Setting the Reference Adjustment Setting a Fault Action Configuring the Adapter 3 5 The adapter is ready to receive I O from the master that is scanner You must now configure the scanner to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O A Reference Adjustment is a percent scaling factor for the Reference from the network It can be set between 0 00 200 00 to allow the drive s Reference to either match the network Reference equal to 100 00 scale below the network Referenc
257. lication includes the PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700H PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L and PowerFlex 7000 drives PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class Drives The Allen Bradley PowerFlex 750 Series of drives supports DPI and at the time of publication includes the PowerFlex 753 and PowerFlex 755 drives 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P G 6 Glossary 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Producer Consumer Network On producer consumer networks packets are identified by content rather than an explicit destination If a node needs the packet it will accept the identifier and consume the packet The source therefore sends a packet once and all the nodes consume the same packet if they need it Data is produced once regardless of the number of consumers Also better synchronization than Master Slave networks is possible because data arrives at each node at the same time Reference Feedback The Reference is used to send a setpoint for example speed frequency and torque to the drive It consists of one word of output to the adapter from the network The size of the word either a 16 bit word or 32 bit word is determined by the drive Feedback is used to monitor the speed of the drive It consists of one word of input from the adapter to the network The size of the word either a 16 bit word or 32 bit word is determined by the drive
258. ller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version A Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Table 6 C Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Read_Message BOOL MSG Single_Read_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 4 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Read_Message MSG J Message CEN Message Control Single_Read_Message lt DN LCERS Using Explicit Messaging 6 7 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version Figure 6 5 Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single _Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single_Read_Message Message Configuration Single_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Message Configuration Single_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag CIP Generic
259. lue is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page C 35 3 Do not continually write parameter data to NVS See the attention on page 6 1 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ControlNet Objects C 33 Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 ee 001 UINT used as an aay of Boolean ao Dale pe Eg 010 USINT bit integer 011 UINT 16 bit integer 100 UDINT 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not Unicode or 16 bits Unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 unsigned 1 signed 4 Hidden 0 visible 1 hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 May be the sink end of a link 1 May not be the sink end of a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled for example drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute For more information see the definit
260. lues of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 25 Example Scattered Write Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive amp Value Data Type Description Scattered_Write_Response INTS S Scattered_Write_Response 0 536 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered _Write_Response 1 o INT _ Pad Word or Error Code ee H Scattered_Write_Response 2 o INT Pad Word Scattered _Write_Response 3 538 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Wwirite_Response 4 o INT Pad Word or Error Code H Scattered_Write_Response 5 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Write_Response 6 725 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Responsel7 o INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered_Write_Response S ONT Pad Word Scattered_Write_Response 9 21555 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Response 10 o INT Pad Word or Error Code Es Scattered Write Response 11 o INT B Pad Word H Scattered_Write_Response 12 780 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Response 13 o INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered_Wite_Response 1 4 o INT Pad Word 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P PLC 5 Controller Examples Using Explicit Messaging 6 23 The ControlNet I O Transfer CIO instruction is used to send explicit messages For PLC 5 xxC controllers Series F revision B or earlier the
261. mal operation The adapter is properly connected and communicating with the drive MOD Green Flashing Normal operation The adapter is operating but is not transferring I O data to a controller Steady Normal operation The adapter is operating and transferring I O data to a controller NETA Green Flashing A temporary channel error has occurred or the NET B channel is in listen only mode Steady Normal operation for that channel The adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network Red Flashing The channel is not receiving network activity Green Flashing There is an invalid link configuration for that channel Red alternately For more details on status indicator operation see page 7 2 and page 7 3 Configuring and Verifying Key Drive Parameters The PowerFlex 7 Class drive can be separately configured for the control and Reference functions in various combinations For example you could set the drive to have its control come from a peripheral or terminal block with the Reference coming from the network Or you could set the drive to have its control come from the network with the Reference coming from another peripheral or terminal block Or you could set the drive to have both its control and Reference come from the network The following steps in this section assume that the drive will receive the Logic Command and Reference from the network 1 Use drive Parameter 090 Speed Ref A Sel to set the
262. meter 536 Accel Time 2 26214 lt N90 1 26214 lt Using Explicit Messaging 6 39 Figure 6 48 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Data File N90 dec EAER 538 26214 16817 0 21555 Oo 16560 780 10019 2 HE Radix Decimal Columns 10 v The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag array N80 Figure 6 49 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 49 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Data File N80 dec EER 0 21555 2E Radix Decimal Se Columns 10 v 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 40 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Controller Examples 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P The CIP messaging method provides two ways to perform explicit messaging e Read Write Parameter Service simplifies setup by requiring less data to be entered in message configuration screens However the Read Write Parameter Service can only be used to perform single parameter read or single parameter write explicit messages Multiple parameter reads or writes must be performed using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service described below Important When performing a Write Parameter message the data will always be written to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage NVS Continuous NVS writes may damag
263. meter 615 Data In C2 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 Data In D1 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 Data In D1 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 Data In D2 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 32 Using the I O With any drive you can use the controller data table addresses to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView and so forth to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive controller data table addresses Table 5 P and Table 5 Q and a ladder logic program that will pass that data to the data table addresses used for messaging Table 5 P PLC 5 and Program Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Status Feedback Ladder Logic Program Description Table Address Peseription Table Address Drive Ready N9 0 0 Status Ready B3 1 0 Drive Active N9 0 1 Status Active B3 1 1 Actual Direction XIO N9 0 3 Status Forward B3 1 3 Actual Direction XIC N9 0 3 Status Reverse B3 1 4 Drive Faulted N9 0 7 Status Faulted B3 1 7 Drive At Speed N9 0 8 Status At Speed B3 1 8 Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 N9 1 Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 N20 1 PowerFlex 753 755 N9 2 Pow
264. meter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 75 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters 3 CEM tiag FIG ControlNet Explicit Message CEN 3 Control Block N16 0 lt DN gt Control Block Length 67 CER Setup Screen lt Important If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate Generic Set service explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 51 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Controller Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 76 Custom Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screen H CEM N16 0 67 Elements Data Table Address Receive Data end Data Receive Data This Controller Message Control Bits 1747 SCNR Slot 1 Timeout TO Size in Words Receive Data 15 Send Data 15 Eror ER INSO 0 Done DN Send Data N80 0 Target Device Enabl
265. meter in another port see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F to determine the instance number For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 or 5404 Hex 3 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Words field to be set to 2 If the parameter being read is a 16 bit integer the Size in Words must be set to 1 When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Size in Words to be set to 2 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL The following page shows ladder logic to convert the data into a floating point 4 See Table 6 4 on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 49 SLC 500 Controller Example Get Attribute Single Response Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 60 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type
266. mmodate application requirements Explicit Messaging support Master Slave hierarchy that can be configured to transmit data to and from a controller on the network User defined fault actions to determine how the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive respond to the following I O messaging communication disruptions Comm FIt Action Controllers in idle mode Idle Flt Action Access to any PowerFlex drive and its connected peripherals on the network to which the adapter is connected Compatible Products Required Equipment Getting Started 1 3 At the time of publication the adapter is compatible with the following products PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerFlex 750 Series drives 1 PowerFlex 700 drives with standard or vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives PowerFlex 700H drives e DPI External Comms Kit PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase II control e SMC Flex smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 vector control or 700S control e SMC 50 smart motor controllers 1 The 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter can be used with PowerFlex 750 Series drives but the adapter must have firmware revision 3 001 or later Also the adapter has the following limitations and differences Only the first 16 bits of the Logic Command and Logic Status words are used Speed Reference and Feedback scaling are Hz or RPM x 1000 depending on the setting of drive pa
267. mple programs enable you to do the following Receive Logic Status information from the drive Send a Logic Command to control the drive for example start stop Send a Reference to the drive and receive Feedback from the drive e e e e Send receive Datalink data to from the drive Logic Command Status Words These examples use the Logic Command word and Logic Status word for PowerFlex 70 700 drives Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to examples where applicable See Appendix D to view details The definition of the bits in these words may vary if you are using a different DPI drive See the documentation for your drive 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 14 Using the I O ControlLogix Controller Example 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P You can use any of RSLogix 5000 software versions to create the ladder logic These are described in separate sections below If your version of RSLogix 5000 software supports drive Add on Profiles we recommend that you use this method Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Drive Add on Profiles Version 16 00 or Later Because the drive Add on Profile automatically created descriptive controller tags Figure 4 2 for the entire I O image in Chapter 4 you can use these tags to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you inten
268. n 20COMM UMO003F EN P Value varies based on parameter instance See the ControlNet specification for a description of the link path 1 Access rule is defined in Bit 4 of instance attribute 4 0 Get Set 1 Get Specified in descriptor data type and data size ControlNet Objects C 7 Parameter Group Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x10 16 Important This object is not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_All Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of groups in the device A group of adapter parameters is appended to the list of groups in the device The total number of groups can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Drive Group 1 Attributes n Last Drive Group Attributes n 1 Adapter Group Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Parameter Group Version WORD 1 2 Get Max Instance WORD Total number of groups 8 Set Native Language BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Group Nam
269. n A2 Port 0 Testpoint Sel 1 Points to Par 970 in the drive 897 Data In B1 Port 5 Anlg Outt Hi Points to Par 90 in Port 5 I O module 905 Data Out A1 Port 0 DC Bus Volts Points to Par 11 in the drive 906 Data Out A2 Port 0 Open Loop Fdbk Points to Par 137 in the drive 907 Data Out B1 Port 5 Anlg Out0 Data Points to Par 77 in Port 5 I O module 03 CN Addr Cfg 2 Node address for the adapter 13 DPI I O Cfg xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 25 M S Input xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 26 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network 1 In this example the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter 20 750 20COMM Communication Carrier Card is installed in Port 6 and a 24V I O module is installed in Port 5 Also Data In B2 D2 Parameters 898 902 and Data Out B2 D2 Parameters 908 912 are enabled but not used gt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Using the I O 5 25 TIP When using a drive that has 16 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 7
270. nables you to do the Chapter 6 following Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P e Control the connected drive via the adapter by using I O e Monitor or configure the drive using explicit messages Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter This chapter provides instructions for installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive The 20 COMM C Series B coax adapter firmware revision 2 xxx or later or 20 COMM Q Series A fiber adapter firmware revision 2 xxx or later can also be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit In this case see Chapter 8 or the 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INOO1 supplied with the kit Topic Page Preparing for an Installation 2 1 Setting the Node Address Switches 2 2 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive 2 3 Connecting the Adapter to the Network 2 6 Applying Power 2 7 Commissioning the Adapter 2 9 Preparing for an Installation Before installing the adapter do the following e Read the ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET INO02 or the ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET IN001 These publications provide information on network basics selecting cables and setting up a network e Verify that you have all required equipment See Required Equipment on page 1 3 ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The
271. neric Profile Name amp Value j DataType Description My_PowerFlex_Drive AB CONTR My_PoweiFlex Drivel Data INT 12 Input Image My_PowerFlex_Drive Data O INT Pad Word H My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 1 INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 INT Logic Status My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 3 INT Speed Feedback My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 4 INT Datalink Out A1 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 5 INT Datalink Out A2 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 6 INT Datalink Out B1 My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data INT Datalink Out B2 My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 8 INT Datalink Out C1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 1 Data 9 INT Datalink Out C2 My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 10 INT Datalink Out D1 PowerFlex 70 Drive My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 11 INT Datalink Out D2 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 AB CONTR My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data INT 10 Output Image 1y_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 INT Logic Command My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 INT Speed Reference H My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 2 INT Datalink In A1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 1 INT Datalink In A2 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 4 INT Datalink In B1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 5 INT Datalink In B2 t My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 INT Datalink In C1 H My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data INT Datalink In C2 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 8 INT Datalink In D1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 INT Datalink In D2 E E3 i E3 Es amp i E3
272. ng the Adapter to Use the Optional I O Data 0 4 0 Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items 0 eee eee eee Specifications COmmMuUNICAtONS 2 16 32 3 Seo es he bel eee ch ye 8S en ont BE ee POE ee eS Electrical feeria aean ep elantnsg ea aaa a aaa a tl ae ieattodad oes teaed oes ct Adapter Parameters Parameter Cist sf ins cereus tne eat sro deer dannd ace arenes delel od anira darn Dee omni uate a n RR 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Appendix C Appendix D Glossary Index Table of Contents iii ControlNet Objects Identity Object s0 i g4 shee oda le Mb bs Ga hh de eb be Gay er ee dade tae bad da C 2 Assembly Object sutn ae web wore nA awadats Waniniel sad avaty Wa dae elie C 3 Register Objects i ses echo ug ieren be a eee eee pee a ees C 4 Parameter Objectes suoro sn rasa ais Disks a eE epee das ale ean vars A ease ul a gee eyo C 5 Parameter Group Object 0 0 ccc Ee E eee e enn ees C 7 PCC Objecti4 cy sands Granted Uae ered aie rates E Sine ans Gea ae es C 8 DPI Device Object sero kha ds gee SEER USE ee Sele hes See ee C 13 DPI Parameter Objects se sea ga Paka sae ASSAY idee Ne oe ate oe C 16 DPI Fault Objects direne oreinek Baek ee sd pot eee E da ek hee cea o be C 22 DPF Alarm ODJECE areca gage bade pat ele eea i ets C 24 DPI Diagnostic Object saute dna ea ina woke tne a Ata ae eae eh BAL eat C 26 DPI Time Object acu sete ks te et ea ee Cale ate
273. nificant DL To Net 04 least significant N45 11 DL From Net 04 most significant DL To Net 04 most significant N45 12 DL From Net 05 least significant DL To Net 05 least significant N45 13 DL From Net 05 most significant DL To Net 05 most significant N45 14 DL From Net 06 least significant DL To Net 06 least significant N45 15 DL From Net 06 most significant DL To Net 06 most significant N45 16 DL From Net 07 least significant DL To Net 07 least significant N45 17 DL From Net 07 most significant DL To Net 07 most significant N45 18 DL From Net 08 least significant DL To Net 08 least significant N45 19 DL From Net 08 most significant DL To Net 08 most significant N45 20 DL From Net 09 least significant DL To Net 09 least significant N45 21 DL From Net 09 most significant DL To Net 09 most significant N45 22 DL From Net 10 least significant DL To Net 10 least significant N45 23 DL From Net 10 most significant DL To Net 10 most significant N45 24 DL From Net 11 least significant DL To Net 11 least significant N45 25 DL From Net 11 most significant DL To Net 11 most significant N45 26 DL From Net 12 least significant DL To Net 12 least significant N45 27 DL From Net 12 most significant DL To Net 12 most significant N45 28 DL From Net 13 least significant DL To Net 13 least significant N45 29 DL From Net 13 most significant DL To Net 13 most significant N45 30 DL From Net 14 least sig
274. nificant DL To Net 14 least significant N45 31 DL From Net 14 most significant DL To Net 14 most significant N45 32 DL From Net 15 least significant DL To Net 15 least significant N45 33 DL From Net 15 most significant DL To Net 15 most significant N45 34 DL From Net 16 least significant DL To Net 16 least significant N45 35 DL From Net 16 most significant DL To Net 16 most significant Important If your controller or HMI platform supports CIP messaging use the CIP Parameter object to get and set parameters N File N150 N199 Description These N files let you read and write parameter values in DPI Port 0 the host PowerFlex drive as 32 bit double words You can interpret the data in various ways for example 32 bit real 32 bit integer To read a parameter you need to send a message with two elements For example to read parameter 1 read two elements beginning at N150 2 As another example to read parameters 2 6 read ten elements beginning at N150 4 Number of parameters in the drive Drive parameters 1 124 Drive parameters 125 249 Drive parameters 250 374 Drive parameters 375 499 N150 0 1 N150 2 249 N151 0 249 N152 0 249 N153 0 249 N199 0 249 Drive parameters 6125 6249 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 12 ControlNet Objects 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM
275. nized only when power is applied to the adapter or it is reset After you change parameter settings cycle power or reset the adapter 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 2 10 Installing the Adapter Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Configuration Tools Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter This chapter provides instructions and information for setting the parameters in the adapter Topic Page Configuration Tools 3 1 Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters 3 2 Setting the Node Address 3 3 Setting the I O Configuration 3 3 Setting Master Slave Hierarchy 3 4 Setting the Reference Adjustment 3 5 Setting a Fault Action 3 5 Resetting the Adapter 3 7 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters 3 7 Updating the Adapter Firmware 3 8 For a list of parameters see Appendix B Adapter Parameters For definitions of terms in this chapter see the Glossary The adapter stores parameters and other information in its own nonvolatile storage NVS memory You must therefore access the adapter to view and edit its parameters The following tools can be used to access the adapter parameters Tool PowerFlex 7 Class HIM See page 3 2 Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later htto Awww ab com support abdrives webupdate software html or online help i
276. nk In D1 olo N MD on A wy P Datalink In D2 5 Q a e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e SMC 50 smart motor controllers Input I O Pad Word Pad Word Logic Status Feedback Datalink Out A1 Datalink Out A2 Datalink Out B1 Datalink Out B2 Datalink Out C1 CO o N MD oy A o NIe Datalink Out C2 j Datalink Out D1 11 Datalink Out D2 Table 5 B ControlLogix Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control Word Output I O 0 Logic Command 1 Reference 2 Datalink In A1 LSW 3 Datalink In A1 MSW 4 Datalink In A2 LSW 5 Datalink In A2 MSW 6 Datalink In B1 LSW 7 Datalink In B1 MSW 8 Datalink In B2 LSW 9 Datalink In B2 MSW 10 Datalink In C1 LSW 11 Datalink In C1 MSW 12 Datalink In C2 LSW 13 Datalink In C2 MSW 14 Datalink In D1 LSW 15 Datalink In D1 MSW 16 Datalink In D2 LSW 17 Datalink In D2 MSW e PowerFlex Digital DC drives Word Input I O 0 Pad Word 1 Pad Word 2 Logic Status 3 Feedback 4 Datalink Out A1 LSW 5 Datalink Out A1 MSW 6 Datalink Out A2 LSW 7 Datalink Out A2 MSW 8 Datalink Out B1 LS
277. nnection Module Info Power Setup Type PowerFlex 70 EC C PowerFlex 70 EC Drive via 20 COMM C Vendor Allen Bradley Name My_PowerFlex_70_E C_Diive Node 2 4 Description mro EE size 16 bit E Comm Format Revision E 2 a Electronic Keying Compatible Keying X Cancel Help 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 18 Configuring the I O When Datalinks are used you must enable the desired Datalinks and assign names to their non descriptive controller tags When a Datalink is enabled you must set the following adapter I O parameters Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter will communicate that Datalink s information with the drive Parameter 25 M S Input turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter will input that Datalink s information from the controller Parameter 26 M S Output turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter will output that Datalink s information to the controller When using Datalinks up to 8 drive Data In xx parameters 300 307 and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters 310 317 must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application Important To change the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the RSLogix 5000 window from flashing green to steady
278. nstalled with the software DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later http www ab com drives driveexplorer or online help installed with the software DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later htto Awww ab com drives drivetools or online help installed with the software 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 3 2 Configuring the Adapter Using the PowerFlex 7 Class If your drive has either an LED or LCD HIM Human Interface Module it HIM to Access Parameters can be used to access parameters in the adapter as shown below We recommend that you read through the steps for your HIM before performing the sequence For additional information see the drive documentation or the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Quick Reference publication 20HIM QRO01 Using an LED HIM Step Example Screens 1 Press the key and then the Device Sel key to display the Device Screen 2 Press the or G key to scroll to the adapter Letters represent files in the drive and numbers represent ports The adapter is usually connected to port 5 im C3 T 3 Press the Enter key to enter your selection A parameter database is constructed and then the first parameter is displayed 4 Edit the parameters using the same techniques that you use to edit drive parameters Using an LCD HIM Step Example Screens 1 In the main menu pre
279. nt queue can contain up to 32 entries Eventually the event queue will become full since its contents are retained through adapter resets At that point a new entry replaces the oldest entry Only an event queue clear operation or adapter power cycle will clear the event queue contents Resetting the adapter to defaults has no effect on the event queue Using the HIM to View and Clear Events Step Example Screen Viewing Events 1 Access parameters in the adapter See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters on Main Menu page 3 2 Parameter 2 Press the or key to scroll to Diagnostics wens Device Select 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then View Event Queue option 5 Press the or GD key to scroll through events The most recent event is Event 1 Event Q E3 Ping Time Fit Clearing Events 1 Access parameters in the adapter See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters on page 3 2 2 Press the or key to scroll to Diagnostics 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter Dgn Events View Event Queue 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then the Clear Event Clear Event option or Clr Event Queue option Clr Event Queue A message will pop up to confirm that you want to clear the message or queue
280. o Important If the drive uses 16 bit Datalinks the most significant word of this value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur ooooocococceo 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P B 4 Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description 25 26 27 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P M S Input Sets the Master Slave input data This data is produced by the scanner and consumed by the adapter M S Output Sets the Master Slave output data This data is produced by the adapter and consumed by the Master device for example scanner Ref Adjust Sets the percent scale factor for the Reference received from the network Details Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O Disabled 1 I O Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required Yes Bit Definition ink D Input ink B Input ink A Input ink C Input Used Used Used al al o Cmd Ref Default Bit s gt lt No gt No o gt lt No o Data Dal o Dat Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O Disabled 1 I O Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required Yes S s 5 5 BSS B gt gt Bit O O 0 O0 SEA olol ajojaja Definition 8 2 2 z z z 2 2 23 als S Sl Sl Sl alal ale 2 2 Z2 aja asja o Default x x x O 0 0 0 1 Bit 7 6 5 44
281. o not write to NVS and should be used for frequently changed parameters Refer to Chapter 5 for information about the I O Image using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 2 Using Explicit Messaging About Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Explicit Messaging is used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates With Explicit Messaging you can configure and monitor a slave device s parameters on the network Important When an explicit message is performed by default no connection is made because it is an unconnected message When timing of the message transaction is important you can create a dedicated message connection between the controller and drive by checking the Connected box on the Communications tab message configuration screen during message setup These message connections are in addition to the I O connection However the trade off for more message connections is decreased network performance If your application cannot tolerate this we recommend to not check the Connected box Important PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives have explicit messaging limitations Table 6 A shows the ControlNet Object Class code compatibilities for these drives Table 6 A Explicit Messaging Class Code Compatibility with Drives
282. ockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss i WARNING Identifies information about practices or Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences A ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures gt D Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation TechConnect PowerFlex SMC Flex DPI SCANport Connected Components Workbench DriveExplorer DriveExecutive DriveTools Control FLASH RSLogix RSNetWorx for ControlNet ControlLogix PLC 5 and SL
283. odel 3 2 LED model 3 2 hold last configuring the adapter for 3 5 definition G 4 Host DPI Parameter object C 30 1 0 about 5 1 configuring for ControlLogix controller 4 2 PLC 5 controller 4 24 SLC 500 controller 4 30 configuring the adapter for 3 3 definition G 4 understanding the I O image 5 2 using with ControlLogix controller 5 14 PLC 5 controller 5 23 SLC 500 controller 5 38 I O Board option in DPI External Comms Kit configuring adapter to use optional I O data 8 3 understanding the I O image 8 2 using Datalink D to send I O data 8 2 viewing optional I O diagnostic data 8 4 Identity object C 2 idle action G 4 Idle Fit Action parameter B 2 installation applying power to the adapter 2 7 commissioning the adapter 2 9 connecting to the drive 2 3 network 2 6 preparing for 2 1 Internal Interface cables connecting to the adapter 2 4 drive 2 4 illustration 2 4 L LCD HIM 3 2 LED HIM 3 2 LEDs see status indicators or name of indicator Logic Command Status bit definitions for PowerFlex 70 700 700H and 700L with 700 Control drives D 1 PowerFlex 700S Phase II Control and 700L with 700S Control drives D 3 PowerFlex 750 Series drives D 5 PowerFlex Digital DC drives D 7 definition G 4 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 5 2 PLC 5 controller 5 4 SLC 500 controller 5 6 using 5 8 M manual conventions P 1 related documentation P 2 website P 2 Index 3 Ma
284. odule Types Found F Close on Create Create Close Heb TIP If the PowerFlex drive is not shown go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate and download the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile From the list select the drive and its connected adapter For this example we selected PowerFlex 70 EC C Click CREATE The drive s New Module screen appears E New Module p General Connection Module Info Drive Type Vendor Name PowerFlex 70 EC C AC Drive via 20 COMM C Allen Bradley My_ControlNet_Bridge My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Description Module Definition Senes Revision Electronic Keying Connection Data Format Status Creating Compatible Module Parameters via Datalinks Parameters 51 On the General tab edit the following data about the drive adapter Box Setting Name Aname to identify the drive Description Optional description of the drive adapter Node The node address of the adapter On the New Module screen in the Module Definition section click Change to launch the Module Definition screen and begin the drive adapter configuration process Configuring the I O 4 7 In this example Datalinks are used to do the following Read Write to Output Current Parameter 3 Accel Time 1 Parameter 140 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 12 Decel Time 1 Parameter 142 Fault 1 Code Parameter 24
285. of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control Using the I O 5 43 When using any of these drives which contain DINT 32 bit format data types you will read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller Table 5 S SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control Data Table Address Description N9 0 Reserved for scanner status N9 1 Reserved for scanner status N9 2 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 3 Speed Feedback N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 LSW N9 1
286. olNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 52 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Using Explicit Messaging Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P SLC 500 Controller Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 64 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 6 64 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data File Data File N50 dec Radix Decimal zi Columns 10 Usage Help Figure 6 65 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for set messages of different parameter types in the SLC 500 controller Figure 6 65 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Sets For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Using Explicit Messaging 6 53 SLC 500 Controller Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging The data structures in Figure 6 66 and Figure 6 67 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high b
287. on No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Example Value 1 14 N50 0 500 2 Generic Set Attribute Single 93 or 9F Hex 140 Dec 9 or 10 Dec Description The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Number of words to be sent written Each word size is a 16 bit integer An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file The time in milliseconds that the message must be completed The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 To write to a parameter in another port see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F to determine the instance number For example to write to parameter 51 of a peripheral in Port
288. on 20D UM001 ex 700S w Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM002 ex 700S w Phase II Control Installation Manual Frames 1 6 publication 20D IN024 ex 700S w Phase II Control Installation Manual Frames 9 14 publication PFLEX INO06 ex 700S w Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 ex 700S w Phase Control Installation Manual Frames 9 and 10 publication PFLEX IN006 ex 700S w Phase II Control Programming Manual All Frame Sizes publication 20D PM001 About This Manual P 3 Description Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700S drives PowerF ex 700L User Manual publication 20L UM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700L Liquid Cooled AC drives PowerF PowerF PowerF 20 750 publi ex 750 Series Drive Installation Instructions publication 750 IN001 ex 750 Series Drive Programming Manual publication 750 PM001 ex 20 750 CNETC Coaxial ControlNet Option Module publication 750COM UM003 20COMM and 20 750COMM F1 Communication Carrier Cards Installation Instructions cation 750COM IN001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 750 Series AC drives PowerF ex Digital DC Drive User Manual publication 20P UM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex Digital DC drives Getting Results with RSLinx Guide publication LINX GR001 and online help Information on using RSLinx Classic software R
289. on Device Text STRING 32 Text identifying the customized device Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 3 Get Component Name STRING 32 Name of the component 4 Get Component Firmware Revision STRUCT of BYTE Major Revision BYTE Minor Revision 5 Get Component Hardware Change Number BYTE 0 Not available 8 Get Component Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00 and OxFFFFFFFF 9 Get International Component Name STRINGN Name of the component with support for Unicode 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 16 ControlNet Objects DPI Parameter Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x93 147 To access Host Config parameters use the HOST DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 0x4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Pa
290. on adapter so that the new I O settings take effect Reset Comm Module Datalink enable values have been downloaded to the Comm module Downloading new Datalink enable values requires the Comm module to be reset before the new settings will be activated Do you want to reset the Comm module now Leje After resetting the communication module which may take up to a minute to complete a Comm Module Reset Error popup message may appear If it does click OK to close this message and complete the adapter reset Then click OK to close the Drive Correlation screen Use the procedure in the next subsection Use RSNetworx for ControlNet Software to Save the I O to the Bridge to do the following Change the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the RSLogix 5000 window from flashing green to steady green Remove the yellow warning symbols in the treeview under the I O Configuration folder and drive profile Use RSNetworx for ControlNet Software to Save the I O to the Bridge After configuring the I O in the controller and drive you must now download and save these configurations to the bridge This will also resolve the I O Not Responding box and the yellow warning symbols amp in the RSLogix 5000 project 1 2 Start RSNetWorx for ControlNet software In the RSNetWorx for ControlNet window select File gt New to display the New File screen Select ControlNet Configuration as the network configuration ty
291. on and look for a W symbol in the No column All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32 bit parameters For example parameter 3 Output Current in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32 bit parameter When using a drive that has 32 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 700 VC PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series drives only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter Figure 5 11 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Datalink Scaling OP Copy File Source My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 6 Dest DC_Bus_voltage Length 2 Copy File Source My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 3 Dest Open_Loop_Fdbk Length 2 Copy File Source My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 10 Dest Anig_Out0_Data Length 2 Copy File Source Accel_Time_1 Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 4 Length 2 Copy File Source Testpoint_Sel_1 Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 Length 2 Copy File Source Anig_Out1_Hi Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 3 Length 2 For PowerFlex 750 Series drives the destination tag can be a REAL or DINT Make the destination tag the same data type as the parameter being read For information on Datalink scaling see page 5 12 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P PLC 5 Controller Example Using the I O 5 23 Creating an RSLogix 5 Project Version 7 00 or Later To transmit read and write data between the controller and d
292. ontroller on page 4 25 there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 5 project version 7 00 or later until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 you need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and the drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks 1 Set adapter Parameters 13 DPI I O Cfg 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output to values that meet your application requirements Configuring the I O 4 25 For this example the adapter I O parameters are set to these values Adapter Parameter No Setting 13 DPI I O Cfg XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 25 M S Input XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 26 M S Output XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 7 or power cycle the drive For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values see Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5 24 Use RSNetWorx for ControlNet Software to Configure the I O and Save It to the Controller To establish an I O configuration that can be used between the controller and drive over a ControlNet network you must first create an I O image for the PLC 5 40C controller s built in scanner 1 Start RSNetWorx for ControlNet software 2 In the RSNetWorx for ControlNet window select File gt New to display the New File screen 3 Select ControlNet Configuration
293. or explicit messaging Figure 6 62 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter B3 0 CEM J H ControlNet Explicit Message CEN 1 Control Block N14 0 CDN Control Block Length 67 CER Setup Screen lt General Tab 1747 SCNR Slot Size in Words Send Data Data Table Address Send Data Message Timeout ControlNet Addr Service Class Instance 2 Attribute Using Explicit Messaging 6 51 SLC 500 Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 63 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screen Eee z CEM N14 0 67 Elements Send Data Receive Data This Controller Message Control Bits 1747 SCNR Slot 1 Timeout TO Size in Words Receive Data 0 Data Table Address Receive Data N A Target Device Error ER Done DN Enabled EN Waiting for Slot WS Send Data 1 Send Data N50 0 Message Timeout x1 ms 500 Scanner Status ControlNet Addr dec 2 Scanner Code hex 0 Service Generic Set Attribute Single Service Code hex No errors Class hex 93 dec 147 Instance hex 8C dec 140 Error Attribute hex 9 dec 9 Member hex f0 dec 0 Error Code hex 0 Error Descripti
294. ort 4 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 0x5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 1 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 129696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of timers in the object excluding the real time clock that is predefined 3 Get First Device Specific Timer WORD Instance of the first timer that is not predefined 4 Set Time Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear all timers Does not clear the real time clock or read only timers 5 Get Number of Supported Time WORD Number of time zones described in the Time Zones Zone List attribute 6 Get Time Zone List STRUCT Identifies a time zone 7 Get Set Active Time Zone ID WORD The ID field of the Time Zone List structure for the desired time zone 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ControlNet Objects C 29
295. ort on the drive to which the adapter is connected N42 8 Peer Adapters read only Bit field of devices having DPI Peer capabilities 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P ControlNet Objects C 11 N45 This N file lets you read and write control I O messages You can write control I O messages only when all of the following conditions are true e The adapter is not receiving I O from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner is in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner e The adapter is not receiving peer I O from another adapter e The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read N45 0 Logic Command least significant Logic Status least significant N45 1 Logic Command most significant Logic Status most significant N45 2 Reference least significant Feedback least significant N45 3 Reference most significant Feedback most significant N45 4 DL From Net 01 least significant DL To Net 01 least significant N45 5 DL From Net 01 most significant DL To Net 01 most significant N45 6 DL From Net 02 least significant DL To Net 02 least significant N45 7 DL From Net 02 most significant DL To Net 02 most significant N45 8 DL From Net 03 least significant DL To Net 03 least significant N45 9 DL From Net 03 most significant DL To Net 03 most significant N45 10 DL From Net 04 least sig
296. ow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single_Read_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be read using Parameter Object Class code 0x0F To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DP Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 6 8 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 4 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit integer parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to DINT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being read is a 16 bit integer the tag Data Type field must be set to INT When using a PowerFlex 700S drive Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 6 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ControlLogix Contro
297. p 6 Output Voltage N70 7 229 1V AC 12 DC Bus Voltage N70 10 325 3V DC 17 Analog In2 Value N70 13 8 318 mA Figure 6 73 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive 2 Data File N60 dec 0 16948 7 10486 15651 137 12673 10843 21581 Oo 16948 260 14680 16661 0 0 DE Radix Decimal x Symbol Columns 10 vf Desc N60 Properties Usage Help The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the N60 integer array to a 16 bit integer or floating tag Figure 6 74 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer the data remains split into two 16 bit integers because there are no 32 bit integers in the SLC 500 controller If the parameter data type is a REAL then the destination tag is a floating point In this case the value must first be swapped with the high and low 16 bit integers and then the two integers copied COP into a floating point address See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 58 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 6 74 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Parameter 001 Output Freq In this message exampl
298. parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero If this bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute If this bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter Bits 20 and 22 must also be set 26 Not Writable While IO Active This parameter cannot be written if the I O data being exchanged between the Host and the 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P peripheral is valid Bit 27 Name ControlNet Objects C 35 Description Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns to a value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to
299. path may be different Browse for Network Select a communications path to the desired network M Autobrowse _Betresh_ 5 ci Workstation USMEQDMWISNIE2 a Linx Gateways Ethernet sy ControlNet ControlNet FJ 01 1747 SCNR 1747 SCNR 1 4Q 185 02 PowerFlex 70 EC PowerFlex 70 EC 240V 4 2A 99 Workstation 1784 PCC gy Ethernet Ethernet gy EtherNet IP Ethernet gy Serial DH 485 gs USB Data Highway Plus Cancel 7 After selecting a valid path to the ControlNet network for this example ControlNet ControlNet click OK Configuring the I O 4 33 As the selected ControlNet path is browsed RSNetWorx for ControlNet software creates a graph view window that shows a graphical representation of the devices on the network ControlNet RSNetWorx for ControlNet File Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help als amp R Qe E dal xi I Edits Enabled Current Current Network Update Time ms 5 00 Avg Scheduled Band Connection Memory Usage 0 20 Unscheduled Bytes Per Sec 489673 Peak Scheduled Band Network Usage a Hardware 1747 SCNR PowerFlex 70 1784 PCC ControlNet to SCANport DC Drive No Drive Object Ec DPI Drives on Fiber ControiNet DPI to ControlNet DSI to ControlNet 01 02 Human Machine Interface Programmable Logic Controller Rockwell Automation miscellaneous Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Siole OBCECROBCRCECHC H 4 gt
300. pe Click OK 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 14 Configuring the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 Select Network gt Online to display the Browse for Network screen Browse for Network Select a communications path to the desired network IV Autobrowse aeren Se Linx Gateways Ethernet gs ControlNet ControlNet ds Ethernet Ethernet de EtherNet IP Ethernet Se Serial DH 485 2 USB Data Highway Plus 6 Expand the communication path from your computer to the ControlNet bridge The following screen shows our example navigating to devices that are on a ControlNet network Depending on the communication link you are using the navigation path may be different Browse for Network Select a communications path to the desired network Autobrowse Refresh Workstation USMEQDMWISNIE2 Aa a Linx Gateways Ethernet gy Ethernet Ethernet gt 10 91 100 70 Unrecognized Device PowerFlex 7 10 91 100 73 Unrecognized Device Port 0 Powe J 10 91 100 77 MicroLogix 1100 UNTITLED f 10 91 100 83 1756 EN2T A 1756 ENZT A amp Backplane 1756 A7 A 00 1756 163 LOGIX5563 v16_Example_u 01 1756 163 LOGIX5563 1756 L63 A L6x 02 1756 163 LOGIX5563 1756 163 A L6x 03 1756 DNB 1756 DNB DeviceNet Scann 04 1756 CNBR D 1756 CNBR D 5 051 Bui as Eas F 01 1756 CNBR D 1756 CNBR D 5
301. pecific service Name Data Type Description Parameter Number UDINT Parameter to read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value to read or write zero when reading 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 36 ControlNet Objects Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P PowerFlex 70 700 700H and Appendix D Logic Command Status Words This appendix presents the definitions of the Logic Command and Logic Status words that are used for some products that can be connected to the adapter If the Logic Command Logic Status for the product that you are using is not listed refer to your product s documentation 700L with 700 Control Drives Logic Command Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Stop 7 0 Not Stop 1 Stop x Start V 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 0 Not Jog Par 100 1 Jog X Clear Faults 0 Not Clear Faults 1 Clear Faults xX X Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control Local Control 0 No Local Control 1 Local Control MOP Increment 0 Not Increment 1 Increment x x Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Accel Rate 1 Command Par 140 10 Accel Rate 2 Command Par 141 11 Hold Accel Rate Xx x Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Decel Rate 1 Command Par 142 10 Dec
302. pon by RSLogix 5000 Drive Add on Profiles version 16 00 or later we recommend using RSLogix 5000 Drive Add on Profiles to take advantage of their benefits more intuitive time saving and less likely to make I O configuration errors Figure 4 3 Classic Profile Screens for Drives E Select Module Module Description Drives 150 SMC Flex C 150 SMC Flex via 20 COMM C 150 SMCDialogPlus CN 1 SMC Dialog Plus Smart Motor Controller via 1203 CN1 1305 ACDrive CN1 1305 AC Drive via 1203 CN1 1336E IMPACTDrive CN1 1336 IMPACT Drive via 1203 CN1 1336F PLUSIIDrive CN1 1336 PLUS II Drive via 1203 CN1 1336R REGENBrake CN1 1336 REGEN Brake via 1203 CN1 1336S PLUSDriveLG CN1 1336 PLUS Drive 007 600 HP Code via 1203 CN1 1336S PLUSDriveSM CN1 1336 PLUS Drive F05 F 100 HP Code via 1203 CN1 1336T 1336T AC Vector Drive 1336T FORCEDriveCNA CN1 1336 FORCE Drive ControlNet Adapter via 1203 CNi 1336T FORCEDrivePLC CN1 1336 FORCE Drive PLC Comm Adapter via 1203 CN1 1336T FORCEDriveStd CN1 1336 FORCE Drive Standard Adapter via 1203 CN1 1395 1395 Digital DC Drive 1397DigitalDCDrive CN1 1397 Digital DC Drive via 1203 CN1 2364F RGU CN1 2364F Regen Bus Supply via 1203 CN1 FlexPak 3000 FiexPak 3000 DC Drive GV3000 GV3000 AC Drive PowerFlex 70 C PowerFlex 70 Drive via 20 COMM C PowerFlex 700 Vector 200V C PowerFlex 700 Vector Drive 208 240V via 20 COMM C Le E Module Properties My_ControlNet_Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC C 3 2 General Co
303. priate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 To read a parameter in another port see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F to determine the instance number For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 9 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging 5 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit integer parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to DINT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being read is a 16 bit integer the tag Data Type field must be set to INT When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when the creating controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 8 Using Explicit Messaging
304. r Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 17408 Class Attributes HIM 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 17409 HIM Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 17410 HIM Parameter 2 Attributes 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 Ox5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password WORD 0 Password disabled n Password 2 Set NVS Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values in NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum WORD Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum WORD Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter WORD First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 8 Get First Parameter Proce
305. r User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 40 Using the I O Device PowerFlex 70 EC Drive Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section PowerFlex 750 Series Drive 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q Adapter Parameter Value Description 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM C Q to be used for the Reference 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Spe
306. r Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Pad Word 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 54 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P SLC 500 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters A Custom scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This read message example reads the values of these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e
307. r assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Reference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value o
308. r computer The Save Configuration dialog box appears Save Configuration Either of the following choices will save the updated schedule OK to the file and to the online network if you are online ok Save Type Cancel Optimize and re write schedule for all connections c Help TIP When both Save Type choices are available we recommend you click Optimize and re write schedule for all connections d Click OK to download the I O configuration to the bridge Configuring the I O 4 17 Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile Versions 13 00 15 00 When compared to using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile all versions the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile provides these advantages e Profiles for specific drives Figure 4 3 that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback The controller tags for Datalinks however have non descriptive UserDefinedData n names e Improved I O configuration no I O assembly configuration required Basic control I O is defined but Datalinks still need to be configured mapped e The Setup tab includes a DriveExecutive icon link to conveniently launch DriveExecutive software when installed on computer to match the adapter I O configuration with the controller and to assign the Datalink parameters in the drive This reduces I O mismatches TIP Because the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile has been significantly improved u
309. rFlex 753 755 and PowerFlex Digital DC Drives When using RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later Datalink scaling is done automatically However when using RSLogix 5000 software version 15 00 or earlier or when using a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller Datalinks require scaling in the following way Parameters are either 16 bit or 32 bit integers or REALs When the parameter is a 32 bit integer the data needs to be copied using a COP command to a DINT tag Because PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers do not support 32 bit integers the data must be separated into two 16 bit integers When the parameter is a REAL the data needs to be copied using a COP command to a REAL tag See subsequent sections in this chapter for ladder logic examples See the drive documentation to determine if the Datalink parameter is a 16 bit or 32 bit integer parameter or a REAL parameter Using 16 Bit Datalinks to Read Write 32 Bit Parameters This subsection only pertains to PowerFlex 70 standard or enhanced control PowerFlex 700 standard control and PowerFlex 700H drives which use 16 bit Datalinks To read or write a 32 bit parameter using 16 bit Datalinks typically both Datalinks of a pair A B C D are set to the same 32 bit parameter For example to read parameter 10 Elapsed Run Time in a PowerFlex 70 drive both Datalink A1 Out Parameter 310 and Datalink A2 Out Parameter 311 are set to 10 Datalink A1 Out will contain the least signific
310. rFlex Digital DC Drives 5 11 Using the I O 5 15 Figure 5 2 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Add on Profile for Logic Status Feedback My_PowerF lex_Drive _DriveStatus_Ready Status_Ready J My_PowerF lex_Drive DriveStatus_Active Status_Active JE My_PowerFlex_Drive DriveStatus_ActualDir Status_Forward JE My_PowerFlex_Drive DriveStatus_ActualDir Status_Reverse VE My_PowerFlex_Drive DriveStatus_Faulted Status_Faulted JE My_PowerFlex_Drive DriveStatus_AtSpeed Status_At_Speed J MOV Move Source My_PowerFlex_Drive 1 OutputF req O Dest Speed_Feedback O Figure 5 3 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Add on Profile for Logic Command Reference Command_Stop My_PowerFlex_Drive O DriveLogicRslt_Stop Command_Start My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_Start Command_Jog My_PowerFlex_Drive O DriveLogicRslt_Jog J Command_Clear_Faults My_PowerFlex_Drive O DriveLogicRslt_ClearFault J Command_Forward_Reverse My_PowerFlex_Drive O DriveLogicRslt_Forward Command_Forward_Reverse My_PowerFlex_Drive O DriveLogicRslt_Reverse a c MOV Move Source Speed_Reference 0e Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 CommandedFreq 0e Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile Versions 13 00 15 00 Because the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile has been significantly improved upon by RSLogix
311. rFlex Digital DC Drives 5 11 Figure 5 15 PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Command Command Stop Drive Stop B3 20 N10 0 JE C gt 0 o _ Command Start Drive Start B3 20 N10 0 JE C gt 1 1 _ Command Jog _ Drive Jog 83 20 N10 0 a JE y PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex Command Clear Faults Drive Clear Faults 750 Series B3 20 N10 0 Drives J gt 3 _ Drive Forward N10 0 C gt 4 _ Drive Reverse N10 0 Cail gt 5 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 36 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Figure 5 16 PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Reference Source N30 1 O lt Dest N10 1 15123 lt MUL Multiply Source A F83 0 0 lt Source B 1000 0 1000 0 lt Dest F8 4 0 0 lt LES ADD Less Than A lt B Add Source A F8 4 Source A F8 4 0 0 lt 0 0 lt Source B 32768 0 SowceB 65536 0 32768 0 lt 65536 0 lt Dest N10 2 0 lt Source A F8 4 0 0 lt Source B 32768 0 32768 0 lt PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Reference PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Reference Continued on next page Using the I O 5 37 Continued from previous page LIM Limit Test Low Lim 0 0 0 0 lt Test F8 4 0 0 HighLim 32767 0 32767 0 lt PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Reference RT Greater Than A gt B Source A F8 4 0 0 lt A Sour
312. rFlex Digital DC Drives Logic Command Word Logic Command Status Words D 7 Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Stop 0 Not Stop 1 Stop X Start VA 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 0 Not Jog Par 266 1 Jog X Clear Faults 0 Not Clear Faults 1 Clear Faults X X Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control Local Control 0 No Local Control 1 Local Control MOP Increment 0 Not Increment 1 Increment X x Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Rate 1 Par 660 10 Use Accel Rate 2 Par 24 11 Use Present Time xX x Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Rate 1 Par 662 10 Use Decel Rate 2 Par 32 11 Use Present Time Reference Select 000 No Command 001 Ref 1 Spd Ref A Par 44 010 Ref 2 Spd Ref B Par 48 011 Ref 3 Preset Spd 3 Par 156 100 Ref 4 Preset Spd 4 Par 157 101 Ref 5 Preset Spd 5 Par 158 110 Ref 6 Preset Spd 6 Par 159 111 Ref 7 Preset Spd 7 Par 160 MOP Decrement 0 Not Decrement 1 Decrement A 0 Not Stop condition logic 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive The Start command acts as a momentary Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to 0 will not stop the drive
313. rameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Table 6 G Example Controller Tags to Write Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Write Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute_Scattered_Write_Message BOOL MSG Scattered_Write_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 19 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters Execute_Scattered_Write_Message MSG IE JE Message HCEN Message Control Scattered_Write_Message lt DN gt HCER Important If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 11 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Using Explicit Messaging 6 19 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version Figure 6 20 Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configur
314. rameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 0x5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 1 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 1 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 0x6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 1 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password WORD 0 Password disabled n Password 2 Set NVS Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values in NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum WORD Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum WORD Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter WORD First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 8 Get First Parameter Processing Error WORD The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0
315. rameter 300 Speed Units Instead of using the 20 COMM C adapter with the PowerFlex 750 Series drive the 20 750 CNETC Coaxial ControlNet option module should be used whenever possible Please see the PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drives Programming Manual publication 750 PM001 for drive parameter information and the 20 750 CNETC ControlNet Option Module User Manual publication 750COM UMO003 for network communication module information Some of the equipment that is required for use with the adapter is shipped with the adapter but some you must supply yourself Equipment Shipped with the Adapter When you unpack the adapter verify that the package includes the following OY One 20 COMM C coax or 20 COMM Q fiber adapter Q One 2 54 cm 1 in long and one 15 24 cm 6 in long Internal Interface cable only one cable is needed to connect the adapter to the drive for which cable to use see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 Q One PowerFlex 7 Class DPI Drive Peripheral Interface Network Communication Adapter Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO004 p TIP When mounting the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive you must use a 20 750 20COMM or 20 750 20COMM F1 Communication Carrier Card publication 750COM IN001 and the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter must have firmware revision 3 001 or later User Supplied Equipment To install and configure the adapter you must supply the following Q A small
316. rameter 653 DPI Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 30 Using the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Table 5 N PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Not Used NQ 2 Speed Feedback LSW N9 3 Speed Feedback MSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data Out A1 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data O
317. rameter 905 Data Out A1 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 MSW N9 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 LSW N9 21 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Reference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned
318. rive you must create discrete I O instructions in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks 1 Start RSLogix 5 software The RSLogix 5 window appears 2 Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Select Processor Type Processor Name EX4MPLE Platform Processor Series Memory Cancel ControNet v PLC5 40C 1 5 D CE Water Mark xfs v Help Revision C Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout ControlNet yi f Decimal 1 Who Active 10 Sec 0 ctal 3 Assign a name for the processor 4 From the pull down menus choose the appropriate choices to match your PLC 5 controller and application 5 Click OK The Select ControlNet Project screen appears Select ControlNet Project Select an existing RSNetworx ControlNet Project file or enter a new file name to create a new ControlNet Project C Program Files Rockwell Software ASNet Worxil Ne Browse ControlNet Node 01 Cancel 6 Click Browse and choose the RSNetWorx for ControlNet project file created in Chapter 4 7 Enter the node address of the controller in the ControlNet Node field 8 Click OK The RSLogix 5 project window appears 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 5 24 Using the I O Device PowerFlex 70 EC Drive Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were us
319. rk with a ControlNet cable NOTE When installing the adapter in either of the following products see the listed publication for instructions e DPI External Comms Kit see the 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO01 supplied with the kit e PowerFlex 750 Series drive see the 20 750 20COMM and 20 750 20COMM F1 Communication Carrier Cards Installation Instructions publication 750COM INO01 supplied with the card 4 Apply power to the adapter Chapter 2 a Verify that the adapter is installed correctly Installing the Adapter The adapter receives power from the drive b Apply power to the drive The status indicators should be green If they flash red there is a problem See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting c Configure and verify key drive parameters 5 Configure the adapter for your application Chapter 3 Set adapter parameters for the following functions as required by Configuring the Adapter your application e Node address e O configuration e Master Slave hierarchy e Fault actions 6 Configure the controller to communicate with the adapter Chapter 4 Use configuration tools such as RSNetWorx for ControlNet Configuring the 0 software and RSLogix software to configure the master on the network to recognize the adapter and drive 7 Create a ladder logic program Chapter 5 acs oe ing the Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix software to Using the VO create a ladder logic program that e
320. rol drives D 3 PowerFlex 750 Series drives D 5 PowerFlex Digital DC drives D 7 bridge G 1 bus off G 1 C cables ControlNet 2 6 DPI Internal Interface 2 3 2 4 CAN Controller Area Network G 1 CIP Common Industrial Protocol G 1 CN Active Cfg parameter B 2 Index CN Addr Act parameter B 1 CN Addr Cfg parameter B 1 CN Rate Act parameter B 1 CN Rate Cfg parameter B 1 Comm FIt Action parameter B 2 commissioning the adapter 2 9 communication module see adapter compatible products 1 3 components of the adapter 1 1 configuration tools 3 1 Connected Components Workbench software adapter configuration tool 1 4 3 1 definition website G 1 connecting adapter to the drive 2 3 network 2 6 ControlFLASH software G 1 controller G 2 ControlLogix controller configuring the I O 4 2 explicit messaging 6 4 using the I O 5 14 ControlNet cable 2 6 connector on adapter 1 1 data rate A 1 example network for ControlLogix controller 4 2 PLC 5 controller 4 24 SLC 500 controller 4 30 network definition G 2 objects list of C 1 to C 29 specification G 2 D data rate G 2 Datalink Size parameter B 1 Datalinks definition G 2 in I O image 5 2 using 5 11 using Datalink D to send optional I O Board data 8 2 diagnostic items 7 4 dimensions A 1 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Index 2 DPI connector on adapter 1 1 data rates A 1 definition G 2
321. rror Code Scattered_Write_Response 5 INT Pad Word Scattered_Wite_Response 6 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Wite_Response INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered_Write_Response 8 INT Pad Word Scattered_Wite_Response 3 INT Parameter Number decimal tH Scattered Write Response 10 9 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered_Write_Response 11 INT Pad Word Scattered_Write_Response 12 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Response 13 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered_Write_Response 1 4 INT Pad Word The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the 32 bit integer and REAL values to the Scattered_Write_Request integer array Figure 6 23 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a REAL then the source tag is a REAL If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer then the source tag is a DINT See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL Figure 6 23 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive COP Copy File Source Accel_Time2 Dest Scattered_Write_Request 1 Length Copy File Source Decel_Time2 Dest Scattered_Write_Request 4 Length Copy File Source Zero_Position Dest Scattered_Write_Request 7 Length Copy File Source Analog_inO_Hi Dest Scattered_Write_Request 10 Length 2 Copy File Source PTP_Setpo
322. rvice data to be sent in the message The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 2 My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered_Write_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable e Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 3 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 4 In this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to requires an array of three INT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to INT 15 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 30 bytes for an INT 15 array Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit
323. s Offline Cancel Apply Help In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 5 0 milliseconds or greater This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter To conserve bandwidth use higher values for communicating with low priority devices For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault boxes unchecked Click OK 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 22 Configuring the I O gt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P The new node My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive in this example now appears under the bridge My_ControlNet_Bridge in this example in the I O Configuration folder If you double click the Controller Tags you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created Figure 4 4 After you save and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic For this example all Datalinks A B C and D are enabled The Input Size is set to 12 words and the Output Size is set to 10 words Also the following adapter I O parameters are set to the following values Adapter Parameter No Setting 13 DPIVO Cfg xxxx 000 KT 1111 25 M S Input XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 26 M S Output XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 11
324. s used to set the states of the outputs when the I O Board takes its Fault Action For details on setting the Fault Action jumper see the I O Board Option Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO02 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 8 4 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 31 OPT Status shows the operating status of the optional I O board Bit State Status Indication Description 0 1 On OPT Present I O data is being exchanged with the adapter 1 1 On OPT Faulted The I O board is taking its fault action 2 1 On Hold Last Fault Action is Hold Last 3 1 On Send Fit Cfg Fault Action is Fault Config Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 32 OPT RX Errors shows the number of I O board receive errors Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 33 OPT FW Version shows the present firmware revision of the optional I O board Diagnostic item 13 Datalink D1 In will show the status of the outputs as a combined decimal value For example a 0 decimal 00 binary indicates both outputs are off and a 3 decimal 11 binary indicates both outputs are on NOTE A status bit is not used for outputs Diagnostic item 21 Datalink
325. site contains all firmware update files and associated Release Notes that describe the following items e Firmware update enhancements and anomalies e How to determine the existing firmware revision e How to update firmware using ControlFLASH DriveExplorer DriveExecutive or HyperTerminal software Using RSLinx Classic Software Chapter 4 Configuring the I O This chapter provides instructions on how to configure a Rockwell Automation ControlLogix PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller to communicate with the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive Topic Page Using RSLinx Classic Software 4 1 ControlLogix Controller Example 4 2 PLC 5 Controller Example 4 24 SLC 500 Controller Example 4 30 RSLinx Classic software in all its variations Lite Gateway OEM and so forth is used to provide a communication link between the computer network and controller RSLinx Classic software requires its network specific driver to be configured before communication is established with network devices To configure the RSLinx driver follow this procedure 1 Start RSLinx Classic software and select Communications gt Configure Drivers to display the Configure Drivers screen From the Available Driver Types pull down menu choose the computer communication card 1784 KTCX 1784 PCC or 1784 PCIC being used to connect your computer to the network Click Add New to display the Add New RSLinx Driver screen Use the
326. specification for more information about ControlNet objects Information about the ControlNet specification is available on the ODVA website http www odva org Supported Data Types Data Type Description BOOL 8 bit value low bit is true or false BOOL n Array of n bits BYTE 8 bit unsigned integer CONTAINER 32 bit parameter value sign extended if necessary DINT 32 bit signed integer DWORD 32 bit unsigned integer INT 16 bit signed integer LWORD 64 bit unsigned integer REAL 32 bit floating point SHORT_STRING 1 byte length indicator that many characters SINT 8 bit signed integer STRING n Array of n characters STRUCT Structure name only no size in addition to elements TCHAR 8 or 16 bit character UDINT 32 bit unsigned integer UINT 16 bit unsigned integer USINT 8 bit unsigned integer WORD 16 bit unsigned integer 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 2 ControlNet Objects Identity Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x01 1 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_All 0x05 Yes Yes Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device connected to the adapter This number of components can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class 1
327. ss from Parameter 03 CN Addr Cfg is stored The source is determined by the settings of the adapter Node Address switches 14 DPI V O Act The Reference Feedback and Datalinks used by the adapter This value is the same as Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg unless the parameter was changed and the adapter was not reset ala ajoja o oO a aut ae Bit Definition 5 5 S slala l Zila OIO O Default x x ojojo 0 I O disabled Bit 7 6 4 3 2 1 I O enabled 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 3 8 Configuring the Adapter Updating the Adapter Firmware 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P The adapter firmware can be updated over the network or serially through a direct connection from a computer to the drive using a 1203 USB or 1203 SSS serial converter When updating firmware over the network you can use the Allen Bradley ControlFLASH software tool the built in update capability of DriveExplorer Lite or Full software or the built in update capability of DriveExecutive software When updating firmware through a direct serial connection from a computer to a drive you can use the same Allen Bradley software tools described above or you can use HyperTerminal software set to the X modem protocol To obtain a firmware update for this adapter go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate This web
328. ss the or GD key to scroll to Device Select F gt Stopped Auto Hz 2 Press the Enter key to enter your selection Main Menu 3 Press the or GD key to scroll to the adapter Diagnostics 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q Parameter 4 Press the Enter key to select the adapter Device Select A parameter database is constructed and then the main menu for the adapter is displayed Port 5 Device 20 COMM C 5 Edit the parameters using the same techniques that you use Main Menu to edit drive parameters Diagnostics Device Select NOTE All configuration procedures throughout this chapter use the PowerFlex 7 Class LCD HIM to access parameters in the adapter and show example LCD HIM screens gt TIP When using a PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM see its User Manual publication 20 HIM UMO001 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Setting the Node Address Setting the I O Configuration Configuring the Adapter 3 3 If the adapter Node Address switches Figure 2 1 are set to O00 Program the value of Parameter 03 CN Addr Cfg determines the node address When in any other combination of positions the Node Address switches determine the node address 1 Set the value of Parameter 03 CN Addr Cfg to a unique node address Port 5 Device Default 02 20 COMM C Parameter 03 CN Addr Cfg 0 lt gt 63 2 Reset
329. sses in Figure 6 46 to store the response values that were written to the requested drive parameters Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 46 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Z Data File N90 dec omr Radix Decimal za Symbol Columns 10 Desc N30 Properties Usage Help The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the 16 bit integer or REAL values to the N90 integer array Figure 6 47 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer the data remains split into two 16 bit integers since there are no 32 bit integers in the PLC 5 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 38 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P controller If the parameter data type is a REAL the floating point value in the PLC 5 controller is copied COP to two 16 bit integers Then the MSW most significant word and LSW least significant word must be swapped before moving MOV the values to the array to be written to See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL Figure 6 47 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 780 PTP Setpoint PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Para
330. ssing Error WORD The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command BYTE 0 No Operation 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks Instance Attributes ControlNet Objects C 31 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline Minimum value CONTAINER Offline Maximum value CONTAINER Offline Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiplier parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad byte always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 33 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Next parameter WORD Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offs
331. ster Slave hierarchy configuring adapter for 3 4 definition G 5 mechanical dimensions A 1 messages see explicit messaging or I O MOD status indicator locating 7 1 troubleshooting with 7 2 mounting the adapter 2 5 M S Input parameter B 4 M S Input parameter configurations 3 4 M S Output parameter B 4 M S Output parameter configurations 3 4 N NET A status indicator locating 7 1 troubleshooting with 7 3 NET B status indicator locating 7 1 troubleshooting with 7 3 network cable 2 6 node address definition G 5 setting with parameter 3 3 setting with switches 2 2 Nonvolatile Storage NVS definition G 5 in adapter 3 1 in drive 5 11 O objects list of C 1 to C 29 ODVA ControlNet specification G 2 P Parameter Group object C 7 Parameter object C 5 parameters accessing 3 1 convention P 1 list of B 1 to B 4 restoring to factory default settings 3 7 PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command G 5 PCCC object C 8 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Index 4 ping G 5 PLC 5 controller configuring the I O 4 24 explicit messaging 6 23 using the I O 5 23 PORT status indicator locating 7 1 troubleshooting with 7 2 power consumption A 1 PowerFlex drives compatible with adapter 1 3 definition G 5 HIM 3 2 installing adapter on 2 3 preparing for an installation 2 1 processor see controller producer consumer network G
332. switch setting is 02 The Node Address switch settings can be verified by viewing Parameter 04 CN Addr Act or Diagnostic Device Item number 27 page 7 5 with any of the following drive configuration tools PowerFlex HIM Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later Installing the Adapter 2 3 Connecting the Adapter to ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex the Drive drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter 1 Remove power from the drive Use static control precautions Remove the drive cover or open the drive door gt YS BM Connect the Internal Interface cable to the DPI port on the drive and then to the DPI connector on the adapter see Figure 2 2 5 Secure and ground the adapter to the drive see Figure 2 3 by doing the following Ona PowerFlex 70 drive fold the Internal Interface cable behind the adapter and mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive screws On a PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700H or PowerFlex 700S drive mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive screws Important Tighten all screws to properly ground the adapter Recommended torque is 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibein 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User
333. t in Program mode click Change Mode to place the controller in Remote Run mode and continue the download In the RSNetWorx for ControlNet graph view window right click the 1747 SCNR icon and choose Scanlist Configuration to display the Scanlist Configuration screen Y Address 01 1747 SCNR Scanlist Configuration Bile Edit View Network Device Connection Help Resource U lolx oO do ie t alil I Edits Enabled Curent Pending Curent Pending Curent Pending Entries Used Dof64 Oof64 Data Input File Usage 0 00 0 00 Discrete Input Usage 0 00 0 00 Data Output File Usage 0 00 0 00 Discrete Output Usage 0 00 0 00 A gt Node Memory Usage Node Network Usage X Overall Network Usage Addr Slot parameters Device Name ___ Connection Name AP RPI Input Address input Output Addr For Help press F1 Online Edit 1747 SCNR Address 01 Idle Configuring the I O 4 35 10 Right click the PowerFlex 70 EC drive row in the screen and select Insert Connection to display the Connection Properties screen Connection Properties Connection Bectronic Keying Details Target Information To Address Eoo Device Name PowerFlex 70 EC To Slot pone Exclusive Owner d Communication Parameters Name Requested Packet Interval ms 120 Addressing Parameters Input Size 4 _y Words Input Address M1 e 3 Output Size 2 gi Words Output Address MO e 3 Conf
334. t the three possible data types for read messages of different parameter types in the PLC 5 controller Figure 6 29 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Copy File Source Parameters All Da A PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 26 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ConitrolNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P PLC 5 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter A write message is used to write to a single parameter The specific N50 0 address shown in this write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Figure 6 30 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter B3 0 CIO J E ControlNet I O Transfer EN 1 Control CT14 0 CDN Setup Screen lt CER Using Explicit Messaging 6 27 PLC 5 Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Figure 6 31 Write Single Message Configuration Screen CIO CT14 0 Command Communication Command CIP Generic Service Code Hex fo Class Number Hex fa Instance Number Hex 8c Attribute Number Hex B Control Bits Ignore if timed out
335. ta In B2 D2 Parameters 898 902 and Data Out B2 D2 Parameters 908 912 are enabled but not used gt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Using the I O 5 17 Controller Tags When you add the adapter and drive to the I O configuration Chapter 4 RSLogix 5000 software automatically creates generic non descriptive controller tags for them In this example program the following controller tags are used Figure 5 4 ControlLogix Controller Tags for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp DataType Description PowerFlex_Drive C AB CONTR __ My_PowerFlex_Drive AB CONTR _ My_PowerFlex_Drive O AB CONTR You can expand the Input and Output tags to reveal the input and output configuration Figure 5 5 ControlLogix Input Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp DataType Description My _PowerFlex_Drive l AB CONTR My_PowerFlex_Drive Data INT 12 Input Image My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 0 INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 1 INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 INT Logic Status My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 3 INT Speed
336. ta n names like those used in RSLogix 5000 software version 15 00 Data Parameters When the Connection field is set to Parameters via Datalinks Format Parameters is automatically selected When the Connection field is set to Datalinks you must select the number of Datalinks required for your application in the Data Format field Datalink In the Input Data column assigns selected drive parameters to be READ by the A B C D controller In the Output Data column assigns selected drive parameters to be WRITTEN by the controller Sort Input When this box is checked sorts the Input Data and Output Data assigned Output parameters by name and then by number and enables parameter search by selection name When unchecked sorts the assigned parameters by parameter number and then by name and enables parameter search by number Use Conveniently selects the speed reference for the drive to come from the Network network This box is checked by default Reference When a 32 bit parameter is selected for Input Data or Output Data for a drive with 16 bit Datalinks two contiguous Datalinks for example x1 and x2 where x A B C or D are automatically assigned as a pair to represent that parameter See Datalink examples in the screen shown on the previous page For more information on Datalinks see Using Datalinks on page 5 11 On the Module Definition screen notice that the automatically assigne
337. tatus Words For other products see their documentation The Reference is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter The Feedback is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller The size of the Reference Feedback is determined by the drive and can be displayed with adapter Parameter 07 Ref Fdbk Size Size Valid Values 16 bit 32768 to 32767 32 bit 2147483648 to 2147483647 Using the I O 5 9 When the Reference and Feedback are enabled and a ControlLogix controller with a drive Add on Profile or Classic Profile is used specific controller tags are automatically created sized 16 bit or 32 bit and placed in the I O image PowerFlex 70 700 700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control The Reference Feedback value is a scaled engineering value it is not in Hertz or RPM The Reference uses a 32767 scale The 32767 endpoint of the scale is equal to the value of drive parameter 55 Maximum Freq which has a default value of 130 Hz For these drives default scaling is 0 15123 which is equal to 0 60 0 Hz This is based on the formula shown below Reference Feedback scaling is limited by drive parameter 82 Maximum Speed If the default value of 60 Hz for parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed the speed Reference Feedback scaling also changes To determine Reference Feedback scaling use the following formula Parameter 82 Parameter 55 32767 Scaling Using driv
338. ted using various Allen Bradley software tools See Updating the Adapter Firmware on page 3 8 for more information Zero Data When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and drive can respond with zero data Zero data results in the drive receiving zero as values for Logic Command Reference and Datalink data If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will stay running but at zero Reference 20 COMM C Q ControiNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P G 8 Glossary Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P A adapter applying power 2 7 commissioning 2 9 compatible products 1 3 components 1 1 configuration tools 3 1 configuring to use with optional I O data 8 3 connecting to the drive 2 3 network 2 6 definition G 1 features 1 2 firmware updating 3 8 grounding 2 5 installation 2 1 to 2 9 mounting on the drive 2 5 node address 2 2 parameters B 1 to B 4 resetting 3 7 specifications A 1 using in a DPI External Comms Kit 8 1 viewing its status 3 7 viewing optional I O diagnostic items 8 4 applying power to the adapter 2 7 Assembly object C 3 attentions 1 5 baud rate see data rate bit definitions of Logic Command Status word for PowerFlex 70 700 700H and 700L with 700 Control drives D 1 PowerFlex 700S Phase II Control and 700L with 700S Cont
339. ter 661 DPI Data Out A2 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 MSW N9 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 LSW N9 21 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Reference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assign
340. ter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P B 2 Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description Details 09 Reset Module Default 0 Ready No action if set to 0 Ready Resets the adapter if Values i z lia dul set to 1 Reset Module Restores the adapter to 2 7 an i ik S its factory default settings if set to 2 Set Defaults oo Re ae j auis This parameter is a command It will be reset to 0 lee R d ired tia ile Ready after the command has been performed a alc ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the adapter is transmitting I O that controls the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected adapter 10 Comm Fit Action Default 0 Fault Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take Values i au if the adapter detects that I O communication has 2 z gt op Dat been disrupted This setting is effective only if I O 3 T e that controls the drive is transmitted through the 4 T Sol d an Ct adapter When communication is re established Tyoe Re vt it g the drive will automatically receive commands over o Required va ine the network again eset Required No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 10 Comm Flt Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if O communication is disrupted By default this parameter faults the
341. ter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 MSW N9 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 LSW N9 21 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Reference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Val
342. ter value Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single_Write_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be written to using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DP Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 10 8 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 4 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to INT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer the tag Data Typ
343. this bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute If this bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter Bits 20 and 22 must also be set 26 Not Writable While IO Active This parameter cannot be written if the I O data being exchanged between the Host and the 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P peripheral is valid Bit 27 Name Command Parameter ControlNet Objects C 21 Description This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns to a value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset
344. this box is checked clicking OK opens additional module properties Properties screens to further configure the drive adapter When unchecked clicking OK closes the drive s New Module screen For this example check this box 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 20 Configuring the I O 6 Under Connection Parameters edit the following information Box Input Assembly Instance 1 This value is required Size The value will vary based on your application setting of Parameters 13 DPI I O Cfg and 26 M S Output and the size 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks in the drive See Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C Output 2 This value is required The value will vary based on your application setting of Parameters 13 DPI I O Cfg and 25 M S Input and the size 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks in the drive See Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C Configuration 6 This value is required 0 This value is required Depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and the number of Datalinks used in your I O configuration Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C defines the number of 16 bit words that you need to enter for the Input Size and Output Size boxes Table 4 A Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex
345. this data to an integer file with Size in Elements set to 2 The following page shows ladder logic to convert floating point data into integer files 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 28 Using Explicit Messaging PLC 5 Controller Example Single Write Response Data In this specific N50 0 message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 32 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 6 32 Example Single Write Response Data File a File N50 dec EER BE Radix Decimal g Symbol Columns f10 Desc OOOO N50 Properties Usage Help Figure 6 33 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages of different parameter types in the PLC 5 controller Figure 6 33 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives N50 0 65 lt 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 29 PLC 5 Controller Explanation of Request and Respons
346. to Parameter 897 Data In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 MSW Using the I O 5 47 Table 5 W SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Reserved for scanner status N9 1 Reserved for scanner status N9 2 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 3 Speed Feedback N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 Data Out A1 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 Data Out A1 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 Data Out A2 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 Data Out A2 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 Data Out B1 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Param
347. tput data from scanner to device read write 11 Datalink D input data from device to scanner read only 12 Datalink D output data from scanner to device read write 13 Logic Status and Feedback Data read only 14 Mask read write 15 Logic Status read only 16 Logic Command read write 17 Feedback read only 18 Reference read write 1 The mask command word is set to the value of the first word of the data where there are ones in the second word of the data Command word 1 and not word 2 or word 1 and word 2 This only controls specified bits in the Logic Command data to the DPI product and does not change the Reference value Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 100 WORD _ Control timeout in seconds Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Bad Flag BOOL If set to 1 then attribute 4 may contain invalid data 0 good 1 bad 2 Get Direction BOOL Direction of data transfer 0 Producer Register drive to network 1 Consumer Register network to drive 3 Get Size WORD Size of register data in bits 4 Conditional Data ARRAY of BITS __ Data to be transferred 1 For this attribute the Access Rule is Get if Direction 0 The Access Rule is Set if Direction 1 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Important Setting a Register object attribute can only be done when
348. trol Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings raha 16 bit mittee heal Size in Words Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output Vv Vv 2 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Vv Vv Vv 6 6 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 Vv Vv Viv 10 10 0 0111 0 0111 0 0111 Vv Vv V iV iv 14 14 0 1111 01111 01111 Vv Vv VV v v 118 18 11111 11111 11111 Table 4 F Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase II control e PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control e PowerFlex 755 drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings OTa er a ele p Szen Words Par 19 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output Vv Vv 4 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 Vv Vv Vv 8 8 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 Vv Vv Viv 12 12 0 0111 0 0111 0 0111 Vv Vv V iV iV 16 16 0 1111 0 1111 01111 Vv Vv VV v v 20 20 11111 11111 11111 gt TIP If necessary the N9 0 N10 0 and N11 0 address defaults can be changed to meet processor address requirements or eliminate address conflicts 11 Click OK 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 30 Configuring the I O 12 13 14 An address row in blue text will be added below the PowerFlex 70 EC drive row
349. trolNet G 2 DriveExecutive software G 3 DriveExplorer software G 3 DriveTools SP software G 3 EDS files G 3 manuals P 2 ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association G 2 RSLogix 5 500 5000 software G 6 RSNetWorx for ControlNet software G 6 Index 5 wiring see cables Z zero data configuring the adapter for 3 5 definition G 7 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P Index 6 Notes 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support For U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the
350. trolNet driver After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple ControlNet network see Figure 4 1 In our example we will configure a ControlLogix controller with 1756 CNBR Series D bridge to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 16 Datalinks 8 to read and 8 to write over the network Figure 4 1 Example ControlLogix Controller ControlNet Network oo Computer with PowerFlex 70 Drive with ControlNet Connection ControlLogix Controller 20 COMM C Adapter with 1756 CNBR Bridge EA SS y Channel A ae Channel B a ControlNet See ae etn r 7 Was Network TIP Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to this manual where it is applicable Configuring the I O 4 3 Adding the Bridge to the I O Configuration To establish communication between the controller and adapter over the network you must first add the ControlLogix controller and its bridge to the I O configuration This procedure is similar for all RSLogix 5000 versions 1 Start RSLogix 5000 software 2 Select File gt New to display the New Controller screen New Controller Vendor Type Revision Name Description Slot Create In Secur
351. tus page 7 3 4 NET B ControlNet Channel B Status page 7 3 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 7 2 Troubleshooting This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the adapter s connection to the drive as shown in the table below PORT Status Indicator Status Cause Off The adapter is not powered or is not properly connected to the drive Corrective Action e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface ribbon cable e Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Flashing Red The adapter is not receiving a ping message from e Verify that cables are securely connected and not damaged Replace the drive cables if necessary e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Steady Red The drive has refused an I O connection from the Important Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI adapter External Comms Kit after making any of the following corrections Another DPI peripheral is using the same DPI port e Verify that all DPI cables on the drive are securely connected and not as the adapter damaged Replace cables if necessary e Verify that the DPI drive supports Datalinks e Configure the adapter to use a Datalink that is not already being used by another peripheral Steady Orange The adapter is connected to a product that does Connect the adapter to
352. ual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 14 ControlNet Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 2 Set Language Code BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 3 Get Product Series BYTE 1 A 2 B 4 Get Number of Components BYTE Number of components for example main control board I O boards and so forth in the device 5 Set User Definable Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device with a user supplied name 6 Get Status Text STRING 12 Text describing the status of the device 7 Get Configuration Code BYTE Identification of variations 8 Get Configuration Text STRING 16 Text identifying a variation of a family device 9 Get Brand Code WORD 0x0001 Allen Bradley 11 Get NVS Checksum WORD Checksum of the Nonvolatile Storage in a device 12 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 13 Get Character Set Code BYTE 0 SCANport HIM 1 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 2 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 3 ISO 8859 3 Latin 3 4 ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic 6 ISO 8859 6 Arabic 7 ISO 8859 7 Greek 8 ISO 8859 8 Hebrew 9 ISO 8859 9 Turkish 10 ISO 8859 10 Nordic 255 ISO 10646 Unicode 15 Get Languages Supported STRUCT of BYTE Number of Languages BYTE n Language Codes see Class Attribute 2 16 Get Date of Manufacture STRUCT of WORD Year BYTE Month
353. ue of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 MSW Using the I O Table 5 U SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5 45 Data Table Address Description N9 0 Reserved for scanner status N9 1 Reserved for scanner status N9 2 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 3 Not Used N9 4 Speed Feedback LSW N9 5 Speed Feedback MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parame
354. uest 4 0 INT Pad Word Scattered _Read_Request 5 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 6 137 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Request 7 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 9 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 9 21581 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Request 10 o INT Pad Word Scattered _Read_Request 11 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 12 260 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Request 13 0 INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 14 o INT Pad Word 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 16 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data The Scattered Read Request message reads the multiple parameters and returns their values to the destination tag Scattered_Read_Response Figure 6 16 or Figure 6 17 shows the parameter values Figure 6 16 Example Scattered Read Response Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Name amp Value Data Type Description Scattered_Read_Response INT 15 Scattered_Read_Response 0 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered _Read_Response 1 325 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered _Read_Response 2 0 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 3 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 4 1 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Read_Response 5 0 INT
355. umber 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance Number 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Attribute Number Not used Snd Addr N80 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file Snd Elems 15 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Rev Addr N90 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Rev Elems 15 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 2 The node address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging In this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer regardless of its actual data type The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6 29 Maximum length is 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page
356. ut A1 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Reference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Dat
357. ut A2 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference N10 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 LSW N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to
358. visor WORD Base INT Offset DWORD Pad BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page C 21 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P C 28 ControlNet Objects DPI Time Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x9B 155 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of timers in the device Instance 1 is always reserved for a real time clock although a device may not support it The total number of timers can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex _ Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Real Time Clock Predefined not always supported 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Timer 1 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 3 Timer 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 B 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI P
359. ware add a message instruction MSG create a new tag for the message Properties Base tag type MESSAGE data type controller scope and click the button in the message instruction For supported classes instances and attributes see Appendix C ControlNet Objects Read a Single Parameter ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later A Parameter Read message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter read follow the RSLogix 5000 software any version single read example on page 6 6 Table 6 B Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Read_Message BOOL MSG Single_Read_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 2 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Read_Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single_Read_Message DN gt LCER Using Explicit Messaging 6 5 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later Figure 6 3 Parameter Read Single Message Configuration Screens Configuration Communication
360. we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires an array of three INT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to INT 15 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 30 bytes for an INT 15 array Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit integer regardless of its actual data type Maximum length is 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code 0x9F 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 15 ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 6 14 or Figure 6 15 in the source tag named Scattered_Read_Request to read these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 007 Output Current Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data Parameter 260 Analog In0 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page C
361. when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 6 12 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Using Explicit Messaging Publication 20COMM UMO003F EN P ControlLogix Controller Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version The data structures in Figure 6 10 and Figure 6 11 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 10 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW 2 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Pad Word 4 Parameter Value LSW 5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 6 Parameter
362. width use higher values for communicating with low priority devices We recommend keeping the default value of 20 0 milliseconds The Inhibit Module box when checked inhibits the module from communicating with the RSLogix 5000 project When the Major Fault on box is checked a major controller fault will occur when the module s connection fails while the controller is in the Run Mode For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault On boxes unchecked but keep the Use Scheduled Connections over ControlNet box checked 10 On the New Module screen click the Drive tab E New Module Drive General Connection Module Into SSS go x al S S My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive pat S E 0 PowerFlex 70 EC Diagrams HS Parameter List a hy 5 20 COMM C tat Parameter Group F All Parameters 85 Skip Frequency 2 Status Creating s ae ey z 90 Speed Ref A Sel 91 Speed Ref A Hi 92 Speed Ref ALo 93 Speed Ref B Sel 94 Speed Ref B Hi 95 Speed Ref BLo 96 TB Man Ref Sel 97 TB Man Ref Hi 98 TB Man Ref Lo 100 Jog Speed 1 101 Preset Speed 1 102 Preset Speed 2 103 Preset Speed 3 104 Preset Speed 4 AAP Annet hand lt ort 0 yowmummrn Revision 5 001 Drive Not Connected 88 Speed Torque Mod Speed Req DEI Port 5 _ I 60 0 Hz 0 0 Hz Preset Spd1 60 0 Hz 0 0 Hz Analog In 1 60 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 10 0 Hz 5 0 Hz 10 0 Hz 20 0 Hz 30 0 Hz My_PowerFle
363. x_70_ PowerFlex 70 EC 480V 2 1A E Parameter List PowerFlex 70 EC My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 500 0 50C 500 0 50C 0 0 3C 1 Zero Torque Sum 22 600 0 11 600 0 1 600 0 100 so 200 300 Analog In 1 High 500 0 SOC 500 0 SOC Analog In 1 High 500 0 SOC 500 0 SOC Analog In 1 DPI 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 4 10 Configuring the I O 20 COMM C Q ControlNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM003F EN P 11 In the treeview double click Parameter List to display the drive s linear parameter list 12 a Click OK on the New Module screen Scroll to drive parameter 90 Speed Ref A Sel and set its value to DPI Port 5 This enables the drive to receive its Reference from the network via the 20 COMM C or 20 COMM Q adapter For speed Reference scaling information see Using Reference Feedback on page 5 8 Click Close to save the setting and close the Parameters List screen The New Module screen reappears The new node My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive in this example now appears under the bridge My_ControlNet_Bridge in this example in the I O Configuration folder If you double click the Controller Tags you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created Figure 4 2 Note that all tag names are defined and Datalinks include the assigned drive parameter name After you sav
364. ximum value CONTAINER Online default value WORD Next WORD Previous WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BYTE 3 Link BYTE Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor DWORD Extended descriptor see page C 20 22 Get International DPI Offline STRUCT of Read Full BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiple parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad byte always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BOOL 32 Extended DPI descriptor STRINGN International DPI parameter name STRINGN International DPI offline parameter units 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page C 21 3 Do not continually write p

PowerFlex 20-COMM-C/-Q ControlNet Adapters User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents